Home

Avaya BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Manual

1. Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 3 28 Tip White Green 255 287 3 Ring Green White 4 29 Tip White Brown 256 288 4 Ring Brown White 5 30 Tip White Slate 257 289 5 Ring Slate White 6 31 Tip Red Blue 258 290 6 Ring Blue Red 7 32 Tip Red Orange 259 291 7 Ring Orange Red 8 33 Tip Red Green 260 292 8 Ring Green Red 9 34 Tip Red Brown 261 293 9 Ring Brown Red 10 35 Tip Red Slate 262 294 10 Ring Slate Red 11 36 Tip Black Blue 263 295 11 Ring Blue Black 12 37 Tip Black Orange 264 296 12 Ring Orange Black 13 38 Tip Black Green 265 297 13 Ring Green Black 14 39 Tip Black Brown 266 298 14 Ring Brown Black 15 40 Tip Black Slate 267 299 15 Ring Slate Black 16 41 Tip Yellow Blue 268 300 16 Ring Blue Yellow 42 No connection Yellow Orange 17 No connection Orange Yellow 50 No connection Violet Slate 25 No connection Slate Violet NN40170 305 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts 237 Table 51 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for analog PSTN lines Sheet 1 of 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 1 26 Tip White Blue 065 095 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 066 096 2 Ring Orange White 28 No connection Whi
2. Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 26 Tip White Blue 1 237 269 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 238 270 2 Ring Orange White 28 Tip White Green 3 239 271 3 Ring Green White 29 Tip White Brown 4 240 272 4 Ring Brown White 30 Tip White Slate 5 241 273 5 Ring Slate White 31 Tip Red Blue 6 242 274 6 Ring Blue Red 32 Tip Red Orange 7 243 275 7 Ring Orange Red 33 Tip Red Green 8 244 276 8 Ring Green Red BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 244 Appendix M ASM8 ASM8 and GASM wiring chart Table 53 ASM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 34 No connection Red Brown 9 No connection Brown Red 50 No connection Violet Slate 25 No connection Slate Violet NN40170 305 245 Appendix N Market profile attributes This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes These attributes are derived from the market profile selected when you configure the system Each market profile uses a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which you deploy the system This section covers the following main topics e Interface availability on page 245 e Tones and cadences o
3. United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Conference tone No No No No No Yes supported Held line Off Off Off Off Off Immediate reminder Delay ring After 4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings transfer Telephony feature settings Transfer callback After4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings timeout Network callback 30 30 30 30 N A 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 600 N A 600 N A 600 N A Target line if busy Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime BRI ISDN Answer Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Mode Companding law A law A law A law A law mu law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 1 2 1 2 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes supported Mode Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 1
4. BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 76 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system Table 15 BCMS50 installation overview Sheet 1 of 2 Tasks Description Refer to Prepare for installation Verify these requirements e environmental e electrical e site telephony wiring Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79 Get required equipment and tools Ensure you have these items e basic hardware e optional equipment e other hardware and tools System equipment supplies and tools on page 81 Inspect the components Verify that the main unit box contains all the required components in good condition Unpacking the main unit on page 84 Install the main unit Mount the main unit using these options e in an equipment rack with a rack mount shelf optional patch panel e ona wall with a wall mount bracket optional wiring field card e onadesktop Installing the main unit on page 83 Inspect the components Verify that the expansion unit box contains all the required components in good condition Unpacking the expansion unit on page 98 Install a media bay module MBM Follow these steps to install an MBM e set the MBM dip switches to factory default e insert the MBM into the expansion unit Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 Install an expansion unit Mount the expansion unit using the same option as the main unit
5. 00 cece eee 209 Appendix B BRI WING CHAM aaa tanken 213 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chat ua as naeh 215 Appendix D WAN ports witing Chart u un a anna 217 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart 2 0 c eee ernennen nn nenn 219 Appendix F DTM Wiring Chan 20u u ana an 221 Appendix G BRIM wiring CHAM sics susanne una anne anne 223 Appendix H ADID WING Cha Haan a aaa 225 Appendix I GATM wiring CHAM sci cc ceed cat vase Ra nieht 227 Appendix J ARTO WINO CHANG erinnern 231 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts 000 eee eee eee 235 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring chartS 20 cece eee eee eee 239 Appendix M ASM8 ASM8 and GASM wiring chart 000 0c cece eee eee 243 Appendix N NN40170 305 Contents 17 Market profile attributes scuuass 0000000000 00 0 00 nn dese es 245 Interface availabilty su 22005 eoeeecseee HE ar naar tn 245 Analog imtenotes 2 245 Digital MONACOS at canes Shes LACUS CURE ESK NETERA Re HE HERR SRO 246 Tones and EEE reine ee are 247 Core parameters for market profiles nuuanu 0c e eee eee ee 255 Analog Trunk parameters 2240 20 RR ae ra san 270 Shoe Palais caccycetivudee ied a seg evel ee chia deeee PG eras 276 GASI PAIRS nur ia irren kan 279 AlA2 paraielera ccviccnscc ar neeeee aaa 281 MeN ea amp Ain A aa aeons Rabaul a aoe ee ode eae ded 281 DIE DER asia mais aaa 283 ees i EEE ET SEITE EEE ET EEE NT 284
6. BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 252 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 58 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Sheet 2 of 2 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence PRC 450 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4s off Russia 425 10 1son Silence 425 10 Continuous 4s off South Africa 367 400 16 400ms on Silence 367 400 16 Continuous 200ms off 400ms on 2s off Spain 425 11 5 1 5son Silence Silence 3 s off Sweden 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 5 s off Switzerland 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4 s off Taiwan 440 480 21 1son Silence 440 480 21 1son 2 s off 2 s off United Kingdom 400 450 14 5 400 ms on Silence 400 450 14 5 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Table 59 Hold Warble Intrusion Sheet 1 of 2 Hold Warble Intrusion Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 400 13 Continuous Silence 425 13 Continuous Bahrain 400 16 Continuous Silence 400 16 Continuous Brazil 425 11 5 0 5 s on Silence Silence 9 5 s off CALA 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Canada 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Caribbean 440 14 Cadenced
7. To open the main unit case Danger Electrical shock warning Disconnect the power cord telephone cables and network cables before opening the BCMSO main unit 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Turn the main unit over so that the bottom of the unit is facing up Remove the three case screws from the back of the unit For the location of the screws see the figure BCM50 case screws on page 197 Figure 78 BCM50 case screws screws 4 Turn the BCM50 unit over so that the top of the unit is facing up 5 While holding the bottom of the BCMSO case slide the top of the case back to disengage the locking clips See the figure Remove the top of the case on page 198 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 198 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component Figure 79 Remove the top of the case Lift the top of the case off the BCM50 unit Proceed to Removing an internal component on page 198 Removing an internal component Use one of the following procedures to remove the component e To remove the hard disk on page 199 e To remove the fan on page 200 e To remove the router card on page 201 Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you
8. Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the first line port on the main unit pins 26 1 i e white blue amp blue white Installing IP phones You can set the system to automatically assign DNs to the IP Phones The autoassign feature assigns DNs in the configured IP DN range If you choose to manually assign DNs choose DNs in the assigned DN range Ensure that the DN type in each DN record is set to IP telephony For details about configuring DN records for the IP telephones see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Configuration Telephony NN40170 305 123 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter This section provides installation instructions for the analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 or ATA The ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to the BCM50 system through a digital station module Examples of analog voice devices are analog telephones and answering machines Examples of analog data communication devices are modems and fax machines The ATA2 is designated as either an ONS on premise station or an OPS off premise station port For information about installing an ATA2 e Configuration overview on page 123 e Installing the ATA2 on page 124 e Configuring the ATA2 on page 127 For ATA2 specifications see the table ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications on page 51 Configuration overview This section describes environmen
9. 1 Slide the BCM50 power supplies into the power supply mounting enclosure 2 Mount the power supply mounting enclosure in the same manner as your other BCMSO units in a rack on a wall or on a destop For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting enclosure see the Nortel BCMS50 Power Supply Mounting Enclosure N0118043 To install a power supply using the single power supply mounting bracket 1 If you want to install one power supply only use the single power supply mounting bracket 2 Attach the single power supply mounting bracket on the wall next to your BCMSO system 3 Snap the power supply into the power supply mounting bracket For more detailed installation instructions for the power supply mounting bracket see the Nortel BCMS0 Single Power Supply Mounting Bracket N0130867 Next step If you install an expansion unit proceed to Installing an expansion unit on page 97 Otherwise proceed to Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 105 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 96 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit NN40170 305 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 97 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit Adding an expansion unit increases the capacity of your BCM50 system by providing a method of adding a media bay module MBM Each MBM you add increases the number of public switched telephone network PSTN trunks or extensions that you can connect to th
10. 1 Use the installation instructions supplied with the external paging hardware to install the external paging system 2 Connect the paging system audio input to the page output on the RJ 21 telephony connector To determine which pair of wires to use for the page output see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 117 3 Connect the paging system relay to the page relay output on the RJ 21 telephony connector To determine which pair of wires to use for the page relay output see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 Warning You must connect the paging connections to unprotected telephony plant l f wiring Tip Paging tips External paging does not support talk back paging equipment unless you use an external line port The BCM50 system provides paging over the telephone speakers when no external paging equipment is available 4 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou add more auxiliary equipment proceed to Connecting an external music source on page 117 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116 e When you finish adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 120 Connecting an external music source Use this procedure to connect an external music source to the BCM50 system You can use any customer supplied approved low power device as a music source A music source includes equipment suc
11. 4 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si3050 DAA 5 Si3050 Si3019 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Table 67 Transmission parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Transmission Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Australia A law 220 Q 820 Q II No N A 0 N A N A 6 dB N A 120 nF Bahrain A law 900 Q 2 16 uF Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 3 dB 6 dB Brazil A law 600 Q 900 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB CALA A law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Canada mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Caribbean mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Global A law 600 Q Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 274 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 67 Transmission parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Transmission 230 nF Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Hong Kong mu law 600 Q No N A 0 N A N A 6 dB N A Ireland A law 2700 Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB 750 QI150 nF Mexico A law 600 Q Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB New Zealand A law 320 Q 1050 Q II No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A 23
12. Proceed to Connect the new power supply on page 178 Connect the new power supply Before you connect the power supply read the warnings about connecting network lines in Wiring warnings on page 111 NN40170 305 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply 179 To connect the new power supply Connect the new power supply See Connecting the power supply on page 108 2 Connect the telephony and data networking lines that you removed in Step 1 of Removing the power supply on page 178 3 Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 180 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply NN40170 305 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit 181 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit Three types of main units are available the BCM50 the BCMS0a and the BCMS0e This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a main unit The figure Overview of replacing a main unit on page 181 shows an overview of replacing a main unit Figure 72 Overview of replacing a main unit Replace the main unit Prepare the BCNH0 system for maintenance Disconnect the cables Remove the Remove the main unit from main unit from the wallmount the rackmount bracket shelf Remove the main unit from the desktop Install the new Install the new Install the new main unit on the main unit on the main unit on the wallmount bracket rackmount shelf desktop Conne
13. S Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland SEN NEN PRC Russia S SN NNT NEA SN SEN NEN 8 SSN NT ON SENN NEN SS SI SI SI S SI SI SI SI SI S South Africa Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan United Kingdom ISIS SI SL SI SI SS SI SS SS SS SS SS S SS SINSI SISESE SS SS SI SI SS SI SI S SS SI SS ST SS IS SANT N S S SN NTN Tones and cadences The following tables provide region specific settings for tones and cadences Note The sum of two tones is indicated by A B The sequence of two tones is indicated by A B BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 248 Appendix N Market profile attributes e Localized Dial and Quiet Dial on page 248 e Special Dial Overflow and Busy on page 249 e Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back on page 251 e Hold Warble Intrusion on page 252 e Reorder 1 kHz on page 253 Table 56 Localized Dial and Quiet Dial Sheet 1 of 2 Dial Quiet Dial Level per Level per Tone Tones _ Tone Market profile Localized Tones Hz dBm0O Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia Yes 400 13 Continuous 400 21 Continuous Bahrain Yes 330 440 16 Continuous 330 440 20 Continuous Brazil Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 18 Continuous CALA No North 440 350 17 Continu
14. 2 Connect the ringer generator to the auxiliary ringer output pair on the RJ 21 telephony connector To determine which pair of wires to use for the auxiliary ringer see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 Warning You must not connect auxiliary ringer to unprotected plant wiring The ringer must not draw more than 50 mA from a 40 V DC source 3 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou add more auxiliary equipment proceed to Connecting an external paging system on page 116 or Connecting an external music source on page 117 e When you finish adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 120 Connecting an external paging system You can connect a customer supplied external paging system to provide paging over external loudspeakers Ensure the paging system follows these guidelines e The paging output from the main unit is 100 mV rms across an input impedance of 600 Q e The output level is 0 dBm0 with reference to 600 ohms for a PCM encoded signal at 0 dBm There is no DC voltage across the page output terminals When you use the page signal output to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay output that contains a floating relay contact pair The system uses this output to control the external paging amplifier e The contact pair for the page relay output has a switch capacity of 50 mA non inductive at 40 V maximum To install an external paging system
15. Appendix N Market profile attributes 271 Table 66 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 1 of 3 Market profile Localized Differences between GATI G4x16 G8x16 New GATM4 8 and Legacy GATM4 8 PSTN Standards Specifications Referenced Pulse Dialing ms Break time Make time time Australia Bahrain Yes Yes None Legacy GATM4 8 NOT supported will not function 1 AS ACIF S003 2005 2nd Edition Customer Access Equipment for Connection to a Telecommunications Network 2 AS ACIF S002 2001 Analogue interworking and non interference requirements for Customer Equipment for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network 1 Bahrain PSTN Specification 2 Si3050 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification 3 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X DAAS Specification 4 ETSI ETS 300 659 1 Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Subscriber line protocol over the local loop for display and related services Part 1 On hook data transmission 66 34 860 25 17 700 Brazil Yes DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4 8 1 Identification of the Calling Party for SPC With DTMF 220 250 713 2 Si3050 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification 66 34 800 CALA No North American based A law None N A 60 40 700 Canada Yes None N A 60 40 700 Caribbean
16. BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide BCM 5 0 Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Number NN40170 305 Document Version 03 03 Date August 2009 NORTEL Copyright 2009 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners SOFTWARE LICENSE NORTEL NETWORKS INC NORTEL NETWORKS TELECOMMUNICATION PRODUCTS THE SOFTWARE FOR A REFUND THIS LEGAL DOCUMENT IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT License BETWEEN YOU THE END USER CUSTOMER AND NORTEL NETWORKS PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE BY USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU THE CUSTOMER ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE RETURN THE UNUSED SOFTWARE AND THE ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION TO NO
17. Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place a A OO N Connect to AC power source a Ifthe system has a UPS connect the USB cable to the USB port on the main unit and plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source wall outlet b Ifthe system has no UPS plug the power supply cable into the AC power source wall outlet 6 Ifthe system uses the external Music Source port connect the music source cable to the Music Source port on the main unit 7 Connect the expansion cables or LAN cables to the expansion ports on the main unit For expansion cables make sure you connect the cables to the expansion ports from which you removed them to ensure the same line and extension numbering 8 If the main unit is a BCM50a or BCMS50e connect the Ethernet cable or ADSL line to the WAN port and the Ethernet cables to the Router card LAN ports Warning Leakage currents You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system 9 Connect the Ethernet cable to the LAN port 10 Connect the 25 pair cable to the RJ 21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit 11 Secure the RJ 21 connector to the BCM50 main unit If you use a straight RJ 21 connector use the two screws on the sides of the connector to secure it If you use a right angle RJ 21 connector use the screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side
18. You can select the DHCP server option to use with the BCMS0 integrated router main units You can select to use the integrated router or you can disable the integrated router and use the DHCP server that is on the main unit Select the DHCP server option through Element Manager Configuration gt Data Services gt DHCP Server gt General Settings tab If you select the standard DHCP server on the main unit you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router You can then configure the DHCP server functionality in the same way as a non router version If you select the DHCP server on the integrated router you can configure the router using the router WebGUI tool By default the integrated router is selected and you configure the BCM50a BCMS50ba BCM50e and BCM50be main units with a dynamic IP address meaning that these units request an IP configuration from a DHCP server Because the integrated router has a DHCP server this DHCP server responds to the request NN40170 305 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 73 By default the router LAN IP address is 192 168 1 1 and the IP address assigned to the BCM50 system is the first IP address in the DHCP pool If the DHCP pool starts at 192 168 1 190 then the BCM5S0 is 192 168 1 190 even though the router is 192 168 1 1 Therefore the BCM50 system receives the IP address 192 168 1 2 subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 from the DHCP server on the integ
19. e in an equipment rack with a rack mount shelf optional patch panel e ona wall with a wall mount bracket optional wiring field card e onadesktop e ontop of another unit not for wall mount option Installing the expansion unit on page 103 Connect the cables Connect the cables between these items e main unit to expansion unit if required e power supply to units with and without a UPS e lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector optional patch panel or WFC e lines and extensions to the MBMs e auxiliary equipment to the RJ 21 telephony connector optional patch panel or WFC Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 105 NN40170 305 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system 77 Table 15 BCMS50 installation overview Sheet 2 of 2 Tasks Description Refer to Install telephones and peripherals You can install these telephones e System telephones e Emergency telephone e IP Phones e 17406 cordless system Installing telephones and peripherals on page 121 Install an ATA2 Perform these steps to install an ATA2 e connect the ATA2 e mount the ATA2 e test insertion loss measurement e configure the ATA2 Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 123 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 78 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system NN40170 305 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites 79
20. BRI ISDN Answer Manual Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Mode Companding law A law A law A law mu law A law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 E1 System settings Number of rings in 2 1 2 1 2 2 a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Mode Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 60 60 60 60 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 08 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 00 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 00 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 00 00 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 263 Table 63 Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway and Poland Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Ringing service Manual Off Manual Off Manual Off mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off
21. Mode Companding law A law A law A law A law mu law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings in 2 2 1 1 1 2 a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes supported Mode Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 60 60 60 60 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 260 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 62 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Ireland parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Ireland Ringing service Manual Manual Off Off Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Res
22. Supervised mode Taiwan ETSI Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not D C 480 620 Hz supported supported 500 ms On 500 ms Off United ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not Kingdom supported 500 ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear GASM8 parameters This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland and Taiwan The GASMS parameters are provided in the following tables NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 277 e Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters on page 277 e Loop interface and call supervision parameters on page 278 e Dial pulse and DTMF parameters on page 278 e MWI On hook Caller Id Disconnect Supervision on page 279 Table 70 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Specifications Transmission Nominal DIP Terminal Network PCM Market switch Standards Input Input coding profile Localized setting used impedance Impedance scheme Australia Yes Australia TS 003 2200 2200 A law TCE2 820 Q II 820 Q II 120 nF 120 nF Bahrain No North American North N A 600 Q 600 Q A law Based A Law America Canada Yes North Refer to North 600 Q 600 Q mu law America Am
23. Yes None N A 60 40 700 Global No North American based A Law None N A 60 40 700 Hong Kong Yes Line Reversal NOT supported on Legacy GATM4 8 1 General Technical Characteristics of Fixed Telecommunications Networks in Hong Kong HKTA 2201 Issue 4 April 2003 2 Network Connection Specification for Connection of Customer Premises Equipment CPE to Direct Dial In DDI Line of the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN in Hong Kong HKTA 2013 Issue 3 February 2003 3 Si3050 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification 4 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305X DAAS Specification 66 33 600 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide Interdigit 272 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 66 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 2 of 3 Market profile Localized Differences between GATI G4x16 G8x16 New GATM4 8 and Legacy GATM4 8 PSTN Standards Specifications Referenced Pulse Dialing ms Break time Make time Interdigit time Ireland Yes Legacy GATM4 8 NOT supported will not function 1 Eircom PSTN Interface Specification Eircom document reference R452 NPDOO Revision 1 1 21 7 2000 2 Si3050 Global Voice Data Direct Access Arrangement Specification 3 ETSI ETS 300 659 1 Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN Subscriber line protocol over the
24. exchange Note The difference in levels is the transmit loss and must be less than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable Configuring the ATA2 Configure the ATA2 using Element Manager or Telset Administration For detailed configuration information see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Configuration Devices BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 128 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter NN40170 305 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system 129 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system This section provides information about configuring the basic BCM50 parameters You can configure advanced parameters using Element Manager or Telset Administration after the BCM50 system is operational The figure Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters on page 129 shows an overview of configuring the basic BCMS0 parameters Figure 59 Overview of configuring the basic BCM50 parameters Configure the basic parameters configure basic parameters Telset Administration Bement Manager Startup Profile Use Telset Use Bement Use the Startup Fdministration to set the basic parameters Manager to set the basic parameters Complete the initial installation Profile to set the basic parameters For simplicity you can configure the basic BCMS0 parameters in two stages e Initial parameters overview on page 130 e Startup parameters overview on page 131 BCM50 Ins
25. 153 Startup Profile requirements To use the Startup Profile template you need the following e acomputer with a USB port e Microsoft Excel 2000 or newer e the Nortel BCM50 Startup Profile template Microsoft Excel template If you do not have the Startup Profile template on your computer you can get a copy from the the Nortel support Web site www nortel com support or the Administrator Applications page on the main unit For details about getting the Startup Profile template from the main unit see the procedure To download the Startup Profile template on page 153 e aportable USB storage device compatible with USB 1 1 formatted for FAT32 Note The Startup Profile template uses macros to perform certain functions You gt must set your Excel macro security level to medium or low to enable the macros From the Tools menu select Macros Select Security Select Medium or Low Exit from Excel Open the Startup Profile template in Excel oa A WN Enable macros if you are prompted NN40170 305 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 153 To download the Startup Profile template 1 Access the BCM50 Web page see the procedure To access the BCM50 Web page on page 140 2 From the Welcome to BCM Web page click Administrator Applications The Administrator Applications page appears 3 From the Administrator Applications page click Startup Profile Template The Startup Profile T
26. 2 nn san 71 If an external DHCP server is present 222m sense nenn 72 BCM50a BCM50ba BCM50e and BCM50be main units Minera OU aaa 72 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system 2 000 e cece ee eee nun nn nen 75 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites 00 cece eee eee 79 Environmental quirements sus HR aan 79 Electrical jeguiremente es sen a a 4SEN MERI rha Gaus 79 Site telephony wiring requirements 2 22m seen een een 80 Digital MOP 2 22 nein 80 ANA BON erstes rent er SEES rt 80 System equipment supplies and tools 0 0 cc ernennen 81 Basi NOWA a4 fi see ce eec a ashe ee ea 81 Optional SAUBERE occu chet el he ie aed by hood aan 81 NN40170 305 Contents 13 Other hardware and ts 5666356004 a REET a RR RED Bee a 81 Chapter 7 Installing the Maln unit 4 044044 0 4840 U cc ciseerecewecuneives 83 Unpacking the Man Unit euere au erahnen 84 Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack 222 22 aana 84 Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf nuanua anaana 85 Installing the patch panel optional 0 0 0 eee 87 Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall 0 00 0c 88 Installing the wiring field card optional 0000 c eee eee ga Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf 00000 cee eee eee 93 Installing the BCM50 power supply 0000 eee 94 Ree NEE EN EEE 95 Chapter 8 Installing
27. 22 Replacing a media bay module 187 To insert the new MBM Unpack the new MBM 2 Verify that all dip switches are in the factory default positions See Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 Install the MBM See Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 If the new MBM is a different type of module for example you replaced a DSM16 with a 4x16 use Element Manager to configure the new MBM before continuing For more information about configuring the MBM see the procedure To configure the MBM s on page 158 5 Reconnect the power supply cable See the procedure To connect a power supply without a UPS on page 109 6 Connect the telephone line and extension cables to the port on the front of the new MBM See Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110 If the new MBM is a different type of module for example you replaced a DSM16 with a 4x16 you must make any additional connections to the MBM before continuing Proceed to the procedure To test the MBM on page 169 Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 188 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module NN40170 305 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 189 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit This chapter describes the procedure for replacing an expansion unit The figure Overview of replacing an expansion unit on page 189 shows an o
28. 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0 s PRC Silence 450 11 5 400 ms on 450 11 5 350 ms on 400 ms off 350 ms off Russia Silence 425 10 160 ms on 425 10 350 ms on 160 ms off 350 ms off South Africa Silence 400 21 250 ms on 400 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Spain Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 200 ms on 1800 333 ms 200 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Sweden 425 11 5 320 ms on 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 250 ms on 25 ms off 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Switzerland Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Taiwan Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 480 620 21 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s United Kingdom 440 350 17 5 0 75 s 0 75 s 400 11 5 Continuous 400 11 5 375 ms on 440 375 ms off NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 251 Table 58 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Sheet 1 of 2 Market profile Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Tones Hz Level per Tone dBm0 Cadence Tones Hz Level per Tone dBm0 Cadence Tones Hz Level per Tone dBm0 Cadence Australia 400 450 14 5 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off Silence 400 450 14 5 Continuous Bahrain 425 15 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Silence 425 15 Continuous B
29. 66 shows the location of the three Ethernet router LEDs BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 66 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs Figure 28 Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units BCM50e shown Router status WAN port LEDs WAN port LEDs coy merit mu Le a A a a Tso 8 The table LAN port LED indicators on page 66 describes the possible Ethernet router LED states Table 11 LAN port LED indicators LED Status Description On The router card is functioning properly Router status Off The router card is not ready or malfunctioned Flashing The router card is rebooting WAN port yellow On The WAN port is operating at 10 Mb s WAN port green On The WAN port is operating at 100 Mb s en port Flashing a WAN port is sending or receiving network data The frequency of the ashes increases with increased traffic Both WAN port Off No connection LEDs NN40170 305 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 67 BRI port LEDs on main unit BRI series only The three BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b BCMS50ba and BCMS50be main units monitor the BRI port status The figure Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units BCM50e shown on page 66 shows the location of the BRI ports and LEDs Figure 29 BRI port LEDs on the BCM50b BCM50ba and BCM50be main units BCM50b shown BRI p
30. BCM50 main unit when performing a system shutdown The UPS feature is supported in all markets 110 120V and 220 240V power standards Hard disk Each main unit contains a single hard disk and a hard disk bracket to install it in the main unit See the figure Hard disk and bracket on page 57 For installation and replacement instructions see Replacing an internal component on page 195 NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 57 Figure 23 Hard disk and bracket Hard disk Hard disk bracket Cooling fan The main units have one cooling fan The expansion unit has two cooling fans See the figure Cooling fan on page 57 Figure 24 Cooling fan S fan connector The cooling fan mounts in the back of the BCM50 enclosure For information about how to install or replace the cooling fan see Replacing an internal component on page 195 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 58 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware RJ 21 telephony connector Use the RJ 21 telephony connector to connect a 25 pair RJ 21 cable to the main unit Then use these 25 pairs of wires to connect to the following telephony devices see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 Four analog lines standard main units only Use these connections for analog trunks from the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN The four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector
31. Expansion port Note The expansion unit connected to expansion LAN port 2 on the main unit is designated as Expansion 1 in Element Manager while the expansion unit connected to expansion LAN port 3 is designated as Expansion 2 Use this information to configure the correct media bay module MBM in Element Manager see Configuring the media bay module on page 158 NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 107 If your BCMS50 system does not have an expansion unit proceed to Connecting the power supply on page 108 To connect an expansion unit Note Keycodes are required for the expansion ports to function If you purchase a keycode for one expansion port only expansion LAN port 2 on the left is active 1 Locate the expansion cable supplied with the expansion unit If have no expansion cable you can use a shielded category 5e compliant Ethernet cable maximum length of 10 m Plug one end of the expansion cable into the expansion port on the expansion unit Perform one of the following tasks see the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 107 e To connect the first expansion unit Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion LAN port 2 on the main unit This expansion unit is now designated as Expansion 1 in Element Manager e To connect the second expansion unit Plug the other end of the expansion cable into expansion LAN port 3 o
32. Livingston Enterprises Inc makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty C The Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network Inc 1992 1993 1994 1995 All Rights Reserved Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and derivative works or modified versions thereof and that both the copyright notice and this permission and disclaimer notice appear in supporting documentation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN AND MERIT NETWORK INC DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET LICENSEE S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE The Regents of the University of Michigan and Merit Network Inc shall not be liable for any special indirect incidental or consequential damages with respect to any claim by Licensee or any third party arising from use of the software Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40170 305 Task List RIOTING aE css ccetoec oe sdeuee teu ccsdcegcisuscslenuet
33. MBM is in maintenance state e MBM is in download state GASM GATM4 GATM8 Blinking Blinking The MBM has power but a hardware problem exists such as e partial failure of power converter e thermal overload e fan failure On On The MBM is ready to operate DTM LEDs The DTM has additional LEDs that are not on most other MBMs The figure DTM LEDs on page 68 shows the location of the DTM LEDs Figure 31 DTM LEDs orm e 2866 o o Power LED Status LED In service LED Loopback test LED Receive LEDs Transmit LEDs The table DTM LED functions on page 68 describes the functions of the DTM LEDs Table 14 DTM LED functions Sheet 1 of 2 LED Status Descriptions Power See Media bay module LEDs expansion units only for details Status See Media bay module LEDs expansion units only for details NN40170 305 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 69 Table 14 DTM LED functions Sheet 2 of 2 LED Status Descriptions In service Flashing The T1 ETSI or PRI trunks are out of service because a loopback test is running or the DTM is initializing Loopback test On A continuity loopback test is running Receive alarm On A problem with the received digital transmission This half duplex link does not work Receive error On A small error as a result of degraded digital transmission Possible causes are an ohmic conne
34. Maintenance Guide 60 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Table 7 Media bay modules Sheet 2 of 2 Component description FRU Description Installation procedure G4x16 G8x16 MBM G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module To install an MBM GASM MBM Analog station media bay modules To install an MBM GATM4 GATM8 MBM Global Analog Trunk Module To install an MBM Accessories You can use the following accessories with the BCM50 system Station auxiliary power supply SAPS provides power for the central answering position CAP when you connect the 7316E to five or more KIMs You can also extend the loop length between a telephone or terminal and the BCMS50 system from 1000 to 2600 feet You must use a dedicated cable to connect the two locations Analog Terminal Adapter 2 ATA2 converts digital signals to analog signals to allow communication with analog devices such as fax machines modems and answering machines The ATA2 supports a maximum transmission rate of 28 8 Kb s With a single line telephone the ATA2 supports a long loop configuration NN40170 305 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 61 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs This section describes the BCM50 system LEDs including BCM50 main unit expansion unit and media bay module MBM LEDs For information about the BCMS0 system LEDs e System status LEDs
35. None 1831 pulse BRI VSC None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple Release code On On Tone duration 120 80 DTMF parameters ms Pause time ms 1 5 3 5 Interdigit time ms 80 100 Table 65 PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Access codes Direct dial digit 0 9 0 9 0 0 Dest code for 9 0 0 0 9 0 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog GATv1 N A N A N A GATv1 GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 268 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 65 PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile
36. Profile to configure parameters 151 Startup Profile requirements 00 cece eee 152 Configuring basic parameters 00 cece ee 153 MONSOD nr air Ree ORES RRO es Sede ORES Ee ANERE 155 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation optional 0000 157 Configuring the media bay module 000 cece eee 158 Configuring modem Sellings iaccatparsiseea ces saved ee aka aan 159 Checking for software updates 20 0000 cee tee 159 GERMIAUNDS VOCs Mal artnet dees RELA 159 Customizing security policies 2 222 nennen nennen nennen nenn 160 Parameter u eae ee NAA 160 NN40170 305 Contents 15 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 161 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN 000 00 c ee eee eee 162 Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN 00000 eee eee eee 163 PERS retten 165 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 0 200s e eee eee eee 167 BER IE tacitly GRUNTS Sa gpeedeush ge okeetacue eenbene dt Senmeswos 171 Besen lee arena teed are eat 171 Acivate ihe reset Falle ns 172 Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components sssssnssnnssssnus 175 Preparing the system for maintenance 00 0c eee eee ee eee 176 Restarting the system after maintenance 2 00 eee ees 176 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply 2 200 ee eee e eee eee eee eee 177 Preparing th
37. Silence Silence by CoreTel Denmark Silence Silence 425 11 5 50 ms on 500 ms off France 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Germany 425 11 5 Continuous Silence 425 11 5 Continuous NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 253 Table 59 Hold Warble Intrusion Sheet 2 of 2 Hold Warble Intrusion Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Global 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Holland 425 11 5 0 5son Silence Silence 9 5 s off Hong Kong Silence Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Ireland 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Italy Silence Silence 425 12 Continuous Mexico 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel New Zealand 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous North America 400 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Norway 425 11 5 200 ms on Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous 600 ms off 200 ms on 10 s off Poland 425 17 5 Continuous Silence 1400 25 Continuous PRC Silence Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Russia 425 10 Continuous Silence 425 10 Continuous South Africa 400 14 Continuous Silence Silence Spain Silence Silence 1400 25 Continuous Sweden Silence Silence 1400 25 0 35s on 15s off Switzerland Silence Silence 1400 25 Continuous Ta
38. Site telephony wiring requirements The following sections describe the requirements for wiring digital telephony devices digital loop and analog telephony devices analog loop to the BCM50 system e Digital loop on page 80 e Analog loop on page 80 Digital loop You must meet the following parameters for a digital loop e one two or three twisted pair cables per telephone e DC loop resistance of less than 64 Q e cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG less than 300 m 975 ft e use of a station auxiliary power supply SAPS for loops 300 m 975 ft to 1200 m 3900 ft In North America the SAPS must be a CSA or UL approved Class 2 power source In Europe the SAPS must be a Class II power source and CE marked e no bridge taps Analog loop You must meet the following parameters for an analog loop e maximum DC loop resistance of 208 Q e maximum cable length 0 5 mm or 24 AWG of 1220 m 4000 ft NN40170 305 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites 81 System equipment supplies and tools For the equipment required to install the BCM50 system Basic hardware on page 81 Optional equipment on page 81 Other hardware and tools on page 81 Basic hardware The BCMS50 system comprises a combination of the following hardware main unit BCM50 BCM50a BCM50e BCM50b BCMS50ba or BCM50be expansion unit media bay module MBM telephones cabling for connections between hardware units You can connect a ma
39. Telephony Resources 3 From the Configured Devices column select IP Sets The Details for Module area appears in the lower pane with the IP Terminal Global Settings tab as the default BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 146 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 4 Configure the IP Terminal Global Settings attributes See the table IP Terminal Global Settings attributes on page 146 Table 26 IP Terminal Global Settings attributes Attribute Description Enable registration Select this check box to allow new IP clients to register with the system WARNING Remember to clear this check box when you finish registering the new telephones password Enable global registration To require the installer to enter a password when IP telephones are configured and registered to the system select this box If this box is not selected disabled a valid Telset user ID and password is required to register IP phones Global password If you select the Enable Global Registration Password check box enter the password the installer enters on the IP telephone to connect to the system If this check box is empty no password prompt occurs during registration Auto assign DNs If you select this check box the system assigns an available DN as an IP terminal requests registration It does not prompt the installer to enter a set DN If this check box is empty the installer rece
40. amp M T1 and E amp M Use this type of trunk line to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 Mbps These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks E1 Digital Trunk Types DASS2 British Trunk provides multiline IDA interconnection to the British Telecom network DPNSS You can use a digital private network signaling system to tie together phone systems from various manufacturers over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to BCM50 networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easy to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls The routing capabilities provide more larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system reconfiguring all the nodes or incurring extensive downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent after you program the DPNSS into the system DPNSS uses a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example you can link corporate offices separated geographically over DPNSS lines to other BCM50 systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they are connected BCM50 systems can function like a private network using DPNSS R2MFC Provides MFC R2 Multi Freq
41. and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCMSO system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire Earth Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth through the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections exchange lines removed first Additional safety information The following interfaces TNV can be connected to the Public Switched Telephone Network in accordance with Nortel and the local carriers installation requirements e BCM50 CSC GATi Ports integrated Loop Start e BCM50 CSC ADSL Port option e Expansion Unit Digital Trunk Module T1 E1 ISDN e Expansion Unit Global Analog Trunk Module 4 and 8 Port Loop Start e Expansion Unit CTM4 8 Loop Start e Expansion Unit 4x16 Loop Start e Expansion Unit G4x16 G8x16 Loop Start BCM50 Installation and Mainten
42. chart 223 Appendix G BRIM wiring chart The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BRIM through the RJ 45 jacks on the front of the media bay module MBM See the figure BRIM RJ 45 ports on page 223 You can connect up to four BRI ISDN lines to the BRIM The figure BRIM RJ 45 ports on page 223 the table BRIM RJ 45 port wiring on page 223 and the table BRIM line numbering on page 224 apply to S Loop and T Loop connections S Loops connect S Loop devices such as video phones terminal adapters and Grp 3 Fax machines The T Loops connect to the CO PSTN Warning For a U loop connection you must connect the BRIM only to an NT1 supplied by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 93 BRIM RJ 45 ports BRIM ISDN BRI S T Interface PEE Loop 2 Loop 3 12345678 Power Status RJ 45 pin out RJ 45 jacks The table BRIM RJ 45 port wiring on page 223 and the table BRIM line numbering on page 224 list the wiring details for the RJ 45 ports Table 42 BRIM RJ 45 port wiring Pin Signal Signal on system side 1 No connection No connection 2 No connection No connection 3 Receive Rx TX 4 Transmit Tx Rx 5 Transmit Tx Rx 6 Receive Rx Tx 7 No connection No connection 8 No connection No connection BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 224 Appendix G BR
43. danger to themselves or other persons Electrical shock hazards from the telecommunication network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users the BCM50 system must be connected to an outlet with a third wire ground Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events near network lines These leakage currents normally safely flow to Protective Earth ground through the power cord Therefore it is mandatory that connection to an earthed outlet is performed first and removed last when cabling to the unit Specifically operations requiring the unit to be powered down must have the network connections central office lines removed first Enhanced 911 configuration A Warning Local state and federal requirements for Emergency 911 services support by Customer Premises Equipment vary Consult your telecommunication service provider regarding compliance with applicable laws and regulations Radio frequency interference AN Warning Equipment generates RF energy This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy If not installed and used in accordance with the installation manual it may cause interference to radio communications It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with
44. disengages from the clips on the wall mount bracket Pull the main unit out and away from the wall mount bracket Set the main unit on a flat clean static free surface a Ff WO N Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88 To remove a desktop mounted main unit 1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182 2 Ifaunit is mounted to the top of the main unit slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit Lift the main unit off of the table and set it on a flat clean static free surface Continue with the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 Installing the new main unit Use one of the following procedures to install the new BCM50 main unit e Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf on page 85 e To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket on page 90 e To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 After you install the new BCM50 main unit proceed to the procedure To connect the cables on page 184 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 184 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit To connect the cables Insert the power supply retention clip into the new main unit Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear Connect the power supply cord to the main unit
45. duration Time Market profile Hz Vrms Id mA mA ms ms ms ms ms Australia 25 65 18 32 200 50 30 150 1500 800 Bahrain 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Canada 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Caribbean 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Global 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Hong Kong 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Ireland 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 850 Mexico 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 New Zealand 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 850 North America 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 850 Poland 25 65 18 32 180 80 75 520 680 800 United Kingdom 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 850 Table 72 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters Dial pulse DTMF Dial pulse Min max Min max Min interdigit DTMF coding Min DTMF coding break make pause scheme detect level Market profile scheme duration ms duration ms duration ms digits dB Australia N 40 90 20 60 300 16 36 Bahrain N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Canada N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Caribbean N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Global N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Hong Kong N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Ireland N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 Mexico N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 New Zealand N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 North America N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Poland N 44 88 25 48 400 12 36 United Kingdom N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 279 Table 73 MWI On hook Caller Id Disconnect Su
46. eee RR Veet aa 122 melang IPRless ss A sh eS a SRE 122 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 14 Contents Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 000 cece eee eee 123 Configuration GVernieW er ur wien eh A cites MA air waded aed rn 123 Analog telephone 6ccs dc ewe cd serie anna 123 PNG DOA e T e424 495429 Sd near 124 Stalling NE ATA ud 124 Connecting the ATA2 occ gevecue nes ee a debs Gee Rees 124 Mounting the ATAZ cist been cided tated Zaire 125 Test insertion loss measurement 0 cece eee ee ee 126 Comu MG ATAS asien leer ren ernten here 127 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system 200 e nennen nenn 129 Initial parameters overview 00 00 c near nennen en nenne nn 130 Startup parameters overview 2 22 en nennen een nenn nn 131 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 133 Configuring the initial parameters 2m cn n sense nennen nennen 134 WESTIE rer rear ie Teer 137 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 139 PISIGQUIGNGS so lt iucdt akon se Oke Rh KE SEATS HOES KORe PRES Re bART RET 140 Accessing the BOMS0 System 245 020 0086 ee kei se Ran cee ta beeen ann 140 Configuring the initial Parameters ccescicedanespenveddabewweees pane eae 141 Configuring the startup parameters 2 2 2n san 143 WEI i056 pkey Pein eee ewe ee Bee oe oe hte ores 149 Chapter 15 Using the Startup
47. for telephone DN records The settings are based on which telephony profile you chose To change these settings use the Element Manager application Specific instructions for configuring telephone operation through Element Manager are in the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Configuration Devices Note For detailed information about installing various telephones and peripherals see the documentation for your particular telephone or peripheral Note Programming occurs on the telephone when the BCM50 system recognizes the telephone on the system For information about installing telephones and peripherals e System telephones on page 121 e Installing an emergency telephone on page 122 e Installing IP phones on page 122 System telephones The BCMS50 system supports a number of analog digital IP telephony and cordless telephones For more information on supported telephones see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Configuration Telephony Analog telephones are supported either through the analog station ports on the main unit analog station MBMs ASM or by connecting to a digital module through an analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 Each piece of equipment has documentation describing installation and telephone features Analog terminal adapter 2 The analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 connects a standard analog voice device or data communication device to a digital station connector on the BCM50 s
48. handle components Always place the components in static free container NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 199 To remove the hard disk Caution Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Remove the two screws that attach the hard disk assembly to the main unit See the figure Cable routing on page 204 Figure 80 Hard disk and bracket installation Remove these screws 3 Lift the hard disk and hard disk bracket from the main unit and place them on a flat clean static free surface BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 200 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 4 Remove the four screws that secure the hard disk to the hard disk bracket See the figure Hard disk and bracket assembly on page 200 Figure 81 Hard disk and bracket assembly Hard disk bracket screws Hard disk bracket Hard disk power cable connector Hard disk cable Power cable Hard disk bracket screws k 5 Remove the hard disk and power cable from the connector 6 Lift the hard disk from the hard disk bracket and set it on a flat clean static free surface 7 Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201 To rem
49. hear a click when the MBM is firmly seated in the expansion unit The MBM must be configured for it to function For information about configuring an MBM see the procedure To configure the MBM s on page 158 4 Proceed with Installing the expansion unit on page 103 NN40170 305 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 103 Installing the expansion unit Make sure that the expansion unit is installed close enough to the main unit so that the supplied expansion cable can be connected between the expansion unit and main unit The expansion unit can be mounted in a rack on a wall or on a desktop Typically the expansion unit is mounted in the same way as the main unit Use one of the following procedures to mount the expansion unit e Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84 e Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88 e Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 Next step If you install a second expansion unit on the system repeat the procedures in this section for the second expansion unit After you install the expansion unit proceed to Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system on page 105 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 104 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 105 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system This section describes how to connect the telephone lines tel
50. line numbers 224 wiring chart 223 C caller ID internal lines 47 48 CAP SAPS cable 60 configuration 157 Element Manager 139 overview 130 Telset Admin 133 conventions guide 31 copyright 2 copyright music source 24 D data devices using ATA 2 124 data transmission requirements ATA2 124 dedicated cable 60 default gateway LAN DHCP scope 145 DHCP BCM50 main unit 71 DHCP server BCM50a BCM50e 72 configuration 71 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 292 Index digital lines 4x16 47 48 digital station media bay module 47 digital telephone 4x16 module 48 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 modules 48 DTM module 45 digital trunk module DTM 45 digitizing analog equipment ATA2 121 dip switches 100 DNs default on 4x16 232 default on ASM 243 default on DSM16 239 default on DSM32 239 default on main unit 209 default on telephony connector 209 DSM 4x16 combination module 48 49 hardware overview 48 DSM16 default DNs 239 wiring chart 239 DSM32 default DNs 239 wiring chart 239 DTM default line numbers 221 description 45 wiring chart 221 E El DTM modules 45 electrical requirements 79 Element Manager basic parameters 139 emergency telephone installing 122 environment standards and specifications 26 environmental requirements 79 ETSI specifications 26 expansion port wiring chart 219 expansion unit 42 installing 97 replacing 189 wiring chart 219 external equipment safety warn
51. no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright C lt If elemental net gt 1995 1996 1997 1998 Lars Fenneberg Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Lars Fenneberg not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Lars Fenneberg Lars Fenneberg makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty Copyright 1992 Livingston Enterprises Inc Livingston Enterprises Inc 6920 Koll Center Parkway Pleasanton CA 94566 Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Livingston Enterprises Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Livingston Enterprises Inc
52. on page 61 e LAN port LEDs on page 63 e ADSL router LEDs BCM50a and BCM50ba only on page 64 e Ethernet router LEDs BCMS50e and BCM50be only on page 65 e BRI port LEDs on main unit BRI series only on page 67 e Media bay module LEDs expansion units only on page 67 e DTM LEDs on page 68 e BRIM LEDs on page 69 System status LEDs The two system status LEDs on the BCM50 main units BCM50 BCM50a BCM50e BCMS0b BCM5S0ba and BCM50be show the current state of the BCM50 system You can view the system status LEDs on the faceplate and on the top of the main unit See the figure Location of system status LEDs on a main unit on page 62 The bottom LED is the power LED and the top LED is the status LED Under normal operating conditions both LEDs are solid green BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 62 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs Figure 25 Location of system status LEDs on a main unit The table System status LED states and descriptions on page 62 describes the meaning of the MANN W Status LED Power LED BCM50 te afi OE ni nis 152 system status LEDs after the system boots up and is in service Table 8 System status LED states and descriptions Power Status LED states seen during Start up sequence Description Solid yellow Solid yellow Power applied to sys
53. page 126 Connecting the ATA2 After you set up the correct environment connect the BCM50 system and the analog device to the ATA2 and then connect the power See the figure ATA2 top view on page 124 Figure 55 ATA2 top view Lire jack Terminal jack Power supply connector receptacle The figure ATA2 pin outs on page 125 shows the pinouts for the connection cables NN40170 305 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 125 Figure 56 ATA2 pin outs Line jack Terminal jack TCM Ring B Lead TCM Tip A Lead r Vay The TCM input is not polarity sensitive To connect the ATA2 Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 terminal jack Connect the other end to your telephone modem or fax Connect one end of a line cord to the ATA2 line jack Connect the other end to an available station port on the BCM50 system a fF oa N For a 120 V or 230 V system plug the DIN connector of the power supply cord into the power supply connector receptacle Plug the adapter into a standard AC outlet Caution In North America the ATA2 must be powered from a Class 2 power source that is UL and CSA approved In Europe the ATA2 must be powered from a Class II power source that is CE marked Mounting the ATA2 After the ATA2 is correctly connected you can mount the unit on a wall as described in this section To
54. parameters for the BCM50 system using Element Manager To enter a name for your system on page 143 To configure the date and time settings on page 143 To configure DHCP server settings on page 144 To configure IP Phones on page 145 To configure SNMP settings on page 146 To configure SNMP community strings on page 147 To configure the SNMP manager list on page 147 To create user accounts on page 148 To enter a name for your system 1 2 3 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it From the System folder select Identification Enter a name for your system in the System name field To configure the date and time settings 1 2 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select Date and Time The Date and Time panel appears BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 144 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 3 Configure the Date and Time attributes See the table Date and Time attributes on page 144 Table 24 Date and Time attributes Attribute Description Date and Time source Set to NTP if the system uses a network server to determine the correct time and date Set to Trunk to receive time and date settings from PSTN if available Set to Manual to manually configure the time and date for your system NTP server address If Date and Time source is set to NTP then enter an address for the server Synch every s
55. the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value Secondary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the secondary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS server address Specify the IP address of the WINS server BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter If the IP address or subnet mask for the corresponding LAN interface changes this value is overwritten Use caution when changing this value WINS node type Specify a client WINS node type The BCM50 system automatically sets this value to H node on all DHCP clients This setting configures the DHCP client PCs to use P node name resolution before resorting to B node name resolution Note Use caution if you change this attribute Lease time Specify the time in seconds for an address assignment until the client lease expires The default is 259 200 seconds 72 hours To configure IP Phones Author s Note This procedure has not been verified as the functionality is not yet present in the interface It will be updated when the functionality becomes available 1 From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it 2 Select
56. the USB port of the computer The Startup Profile is now stored on the USB storage device To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM50 system Disconnect the power supply from the main unit Insert the USB storage device into the USB port on the main unit If the BCM50 system has a UPS insert the USB storage device into the Linux compatible USB hub Connect the power supply to the BCM50 system The BCM50 automatically detects the Startup Profile file and loads the information during the bootup sequence Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the BCM50 system to boot After you successfully apply the Startup Profile the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration After the BCM50 system reboots the Startup Profile is fully loaded NN40170 305 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 155 If an error occurs the status LED flashes red View the log file written to the USB storage device for a description of the Startup Profile errors If no errors exist the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the system configuration After the reboot finishes the power and status LEDs are solid green Note The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycode loaded After a keycode is loaded the Startup Profile does not work This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system 4
57. the proper cables on a protected internal wiring system Do not connect telephones to wiring that extends to the outside of the building Read and follow the installation instructions carefully Warning Use only qualified persons to service the system A Service personnel with the appropriate training and experience must perform the installation and service of this unit Service personnel must be aware of the hazards of working with telephony equipment and wiring They must have experience in techniques that minimize any danger of shock or equipment damage Warning Leakage currents Service personnel must be alert to the possibility of high leakage currents becoming available on metal system surfaces during power line fault events on network lines These leakage currents normally flow safely to protective earth ground through the power cord However if the AC power is unplugged prior to disconnecting the cables from the BCM50 units this hazard can occur System shutdown You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet System startup You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 112 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system Danger Electrical shock hazards Electrical shock hazards from the telecommuni
58. to the media bay module MBM and connects the LAN datagrams to the LAN port on the expansion unit You can then use the LAN port on the expansion unit to connect network devices such as IP telephones If an expansion unit is not connected to the port you can use the expansion port to connect network devices such as IP telephones The expansion ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port NN40170 305 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 163 Table 30 LAN ports on the main unit Sheet 2 of 2 Port name Function Router card The router card LAN ports connect network devices such as IP telephones to the LAN LAN ports These ports connect to the network switch built into the main unit Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port Expansion unit The expansion unit LAN port connects network devices such as IP telephones to the LAN port LAN These ports are connected to the network switch built into the main unit Any devices connected to these ports are on the same subnet as the device connected to the LAN port To connect the BCM50 system to the LAN 1 Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your LAN Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the LAN port on the main unit To use the intern
59. two line display telephone Note This is available for only 15 minutes after the system starts For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter see the Telset Administration Guide Configure other telephony startup parameters using Feature CONFIG For more information see the Telset Administration Guide To initialize voice mail Initialize your voice mail system using Feature 983 from a two line display telephone For information about using Telset Administration to initialize your voice mail system see the CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide To create Telset user accounts Note You can create Telset accounts using only Telset Administration To create Element Manager accounts you must use Element Manager Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone 2 Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select User Accounts Press OK The Accounts screen appears Press CHNGE to create an account Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts to create N Oo oO fF W Press CRT to create the account If you see the DEL command instead of the CRT command then the account already exists NN40170 305 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 137 8 Press BACK The Acc
60. unit Retention clip mounting hole A small hole into which you insert the retention clip The retention clip secures the power connector to the unit OAM port port 0 An RJ 45 jack used to connect a computer running administration software such as Element Manager to the main unit LAN port port 1 An RJ 45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit Expansion LAN ports ports 2 and 3 Two RJ 45 jacks used to connect the expansion units to the main unit The expansion ports can also provide connections to the Ethernet switch internal to the main unit If the BCM50 system has no expansion units connected to these ports you can use the expansion LAN ports to connect additional devices to the LAN Note Activate the feature for the expansion ports by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode If you purchase only one expansion port feature the expansion port on the left port 2 is active WAN port BCM50a and BCM50e only For BCM50a An RJ 11 jack used to connect the BCM50a main unit to the ADSL line provided by your Internet service provider ISP For BCM50e An RJ 45 jack used to connect the BCM50e to the Ethernet port of a WAN edge device for example an external ADSL modem or cable modem Note This port is not available on the BCM50 main unit Additional LAN ports BCM50a and BCM50e only Four RJ 45 jacks that provide connections to the Ethernet switch in the BCM50
61. unit Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall To wall mount a BCM50 unit you need a wall mount bracket The wall mount bracket attaches to the wall and the BCMS50 unit connects to the wall mount bracket If the BCM50 system includes additional units you need a wall mount bracket for each unit Each wall mount bracket includes a cable management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units An optional wiring field card simplifies the cable connections for the lines and extensions If desired you can install an optional plywood backboard 2 cm 3 4 in thick Caution For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50 see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79 Caution You must mount BCM50 units side by side on the wall DO NOT attempt to mount units on top of each other when using the wall mount option Caution To keep the BCM50 operating at the optimal internal temperature keep the top sides and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment Use the following procedures to install the BCM50 unit on a wall e To install the BCM50 wall mount bracket on page 88 e To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket on page 90 To install the BCM50 wall mount bracket 1 Use a pencil to mark the location of the plywood backboard on the wall Use a ruler and a level to make sure that the plywood backboard is
62. wiring charts on page 231 G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 235 Connecting extensions to the expansion units Extensions connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion unit NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 115 To connect extensions to DSM16 DSM32 ASM8 4x16 G4x16 or G8x16 MBMs 1 Read the warnings in the Wiring warnings on page 111 section Obtain a 25 pair cable with an RJ 21 connector on one end Plug the RJ 21 connector of the cable into the RJ 21 connector on the front of the MBM Use the upper RJ 21 connector on the G4x16 G8x16 MBMs to connect digital extensions 4 Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ 21 connector to the MBM e Ifyou use a straight RJ 21 connector use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it e Ifyou use a right angle RJ 21 connector use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector To secure the right side of the connector use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25 pair cable to the anchor on the MBM Connect the other end of the cable to the local connecting blocks If you connect extensions to a DSM32 repeat steps 2 to 5 for the second RJ 21 connector Select the appropriate option for your system e If your BCMSO system has another expansion unit repeat this procedure if you add more extensions or proceed to Connecting telephone
63. 0 9 1 11 411 3 911 3 0200 10 911 3 02000 7 020000 10 0201 10 02010 9 07 10 071 11 0718 10 072 11 077 11 09 11 1 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto None Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None None Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 270 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 65 PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Interdigit time ms United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language English EuroSpanish Swedish German English UKEnglish first is default French English English English French S
64. 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide 178 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply Preparing the system for maintenance In most cases if the power supply for the main unit is faulty the system is already shut down If this is the case proceed to Removing the power supply on page 178 If you replace the expansion unit power supply or if the system is still operating perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 176 Removing the power supply Before you disconnect the power supply read the warnings about connecting network lines in Wiring warnings on page 111 To remove the power supply 1 Remove the telephony and data networking lines from the BCM50 units These lines include e the RJ 21 telephony connector on the main unit e the ADSL line in the WAN port on a BCM50a main unit e any analog telephone lines in the media bay modules MBM in the expansion units e any digital telephone lines in the MBMs in the expansion units Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord Remove the power supply cord from the BCM50 unit A Warning Leakage currents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet 4 Remove the power supply cord from the AC wall outlet If your system has a UPS remove the power supply cord from the UPS socket Remove the power supply from the table rack mount shelf or wall mount bracket
65. 0 nF North America mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Poland A law 600 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A PRC A law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Russia A law 600 Q Yes South Africa A law 220 Q 820 Q 11 115 No nF Spain A law 270 Q 750 Q II 150 No nF Taiwan u law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB United Kingdom A law 320 Q 1050 Q II No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A Table 68 Call supervision parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Call supervision Rin Link flash time Force on hook Wetting time BEER Market profile ms OSI time ms time ms ms count ms Australia 100 100 1600 0 150 Bahrain 600 100 1600 N A 256 Brazil 300 100 2000 N A 256 CALA 600 100 1500 N A 256 Canada 600 100 1600 N A 256 Caribbean 600 100 1600 N A 256 Global 600 100 1500 N A 256 Hong Kong 500 100 1000 N A 256 Ireland 150 100 2000 N A 200 Mexico 600 100 1600 N A 256 New Zealand 90 100 1600 15 200 North America 600 100 1600 N A 256 Poland 500 500 1800 N A 256 PRC 600 100 1600 N A 256 Russia 100 100 400 0 256 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 275 Table 68 Call supervision parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Call supervision Link flash time Force on hook Wetting time en Market profile ms OSI time ms time ms ms count ms South Africa 100 100 1600 0 256 Spain 120 100 1600 0 256 Taiwan 600 100 1600 0 256 United K
66. 03 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 102 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 MCDN MCDN 4ESS MCDN Global analog N A GATv1 N A GATv1 N A GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 262 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 63 Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway and Poland Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Conference tone Yes No Yes No No Yes supported Held line reminder Off Off Immediate Off Off After 30 seconds Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings After4 rings After 15 rings Telephony feature Transfer callback After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 15 rings settings timeout Network callback 30 30 30 N A 30 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A 600 N A 600 N A N A Target line if busy PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime
67. 03 255 603 271 703 287 803 3 Ring Green White BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 240 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 3 Default DN on Expansion Default DN on Expansion port 1 port 2 N N N N L0 N 9 oD s m 53 5 zay o ag S ro 5 aN zsz s M m a 0 S ae sc D S a sc a Set Pin Connection Wire color 9 5 S 5 29 Tip White Brown 4 240 504 256 604 272 704 288 804 4 Ring Brown White 30 Tip White Slate 5 241 505 257 605 273 705 289 805 5 Ring Slate White 31 Tip Red Blue 6 242 506 258 606 274 706 290 806 6 Ring Blue Red 32 Tip Red Orange 7 243 507 259 607 275 707 291 807 7 Ring Orange Red 33 Tip Red Green 8 244 508 260 608 276 708 292 808 8 Ring Green Red 34 Tip Red Brown 9 245 509 261 609 277 709 293 809 9 Ring Brown Red 35 Tip Red Slate 10 246 510 262 610 278 710 294 810 10 Ring Slate Red 36 Tip Black Blue 11 247 511 263 611 279 711 295 811 11 Ring Blue Black 37 Tip Black Orange 12 248 512 264 612 280 712 296 812 12 Ring Orange Black 38 Tip Black Green 13 249 513 265 613 281 713 297 813 13 Ring Green Black 39 Tip Black Brown 14 250 514 266 614 282 714 298 814 14 Ring Brown Black 40 Tip Black Slate 15 251 515 267 615 283 715 299 815
68. 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 1000 Q II 220 nF NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 283 Table 76 ATA2 DR7 Market Support Transmission and Loop Interface parameters Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Loop Current Loop Terminal PCM Ringing Ringing Detect Current Market Input Coding Frequency Amplitude Threshold Limit profile Localized Impedance Scheme Hz Vrms mA mA Brazil Yes 900 Q A Law 25 75 18 85 CALA Yes 900 W A Law 25 75 18 85 Denmark Yes 300 Q A Law 25 75 12 85 1000 Q II 220 nF France Yes 210 Q A Law 25 75 6 65 1020 Q II 140 nF Germany Yes 220 0 A Law 25 75 6 55 820 Q II 110 nF Holland Yes 300 Q A Law 25 75 12 55 1000 Q II 220 nF Italy Yes 180Q A Law 25 75 6 23 620 Q 62 nF Norway Yes 120 Q A Law 25 75 12 85 840 Q II 110 nF Poland Yes 220 Q A Law 50 80 18 40 820 Q1 120 nF Spain Yes 220 Q A Law 25 75 6 55 820 Q 120 nF Sweden Yes 200 Q A Law 25 75 12 30 1000 Q II 200 nF Switzerland Yes 220 Q A Law 25 75 6 55 820 Q II 120 nF BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 284 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 77 ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision Dial Pulse and DTMF parameters Call Supervision Dial Pulse Duration ms Duration ms DTMF Min DTMF Dial DTMF Detect Pulse
69. 11 5 400 ms on N A Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off North America 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off Norway 425 11 5 200 ms on N A 200 ms off Poland 425 17 5 200 ms on N A 200 ms off PRC 450 11 5 700 ms on N A 700 ms off Russia Silence N A South Africa 400 21 250ms on N A 250ms off Spain 425 11 5 200 ms on N A 200 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 600 ms off Sweden 425 11 5 250 ms on N A 750 ms off NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 255 Table 60 Reorder 1 kHz Sheet 3 of 3 Reorder 1 kHz Level Level Tones per Tone Tones per Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Switzerland 425 11 5 200 ms on N A 200 ms off Taiwan 480 620 21 300 ms on N A 300 ms off United Kingdom 400 11 5 400 ms on N A Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off Core parameters for market profiles The core parameters for the available market profiles are provided in the following tables e Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters on page 255 e France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Ireland parameters on page 258 e Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway and Poland on page 261 e Russia and South Africa parameters on page 264 e PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters on page 267 Table 61 Australia Brazi
70. 15 Ring Slate Black 41 Tip Yellow Blue 16 252 516 268 616 284 716 300 816 16 Ring Blue Yellow No 42 connection Yellow Orange No 17 eqnneaion Orange Yellow NN40170 305 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 241 Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 3 of 3 Default DN on Expansion Default DN on Expansion port 1 port 2 N N N N L0 N 9 N Ss o e85 35 dsl 284 5 25 or mp T pp g oc ga al g oc a Sc a a a Set Pin Connection Wire color 9 S Q 5 No 50 Eonnastion Violet Slate No 25 F onnoction Slate Violet BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 242 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts NN40170 305 Appendix M ASM8 ASM8 and GASM wiring chart 243 Appendix M ASM8 ASM8 and GASM wiring chart Analog telephony devices such as single line telephones modems and Fax machines connect to the Analog Station Module ASM through the RJ 21 connector on the front of the media bay module See the figure ASM RJ 21 connector on page 243 Figure 99 ASM RJ 21 connector GASM GASM 1 25 ol omj sn ono ow Se 26 50 RJ 21 pin out RJ 21 connector The table ASM RJ 21 connector wiring on page 243 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the ASM Table 53 ASM RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2
71. 16 through the lower RJ 21 amphenol connector on the front of the MBM See the figure G4x16 G8x16 connectors on page 235 The digital telephones such as the Business Series Telephones connect to the upper RJ 21 amphenol connector on the front of the G4x16 or G8x16 MBM Figure 97 G4x16 G8x16 connectors Power Status RJ 21 pin out RJ 21 amphenol connector for 16 digital telephones RJ 21 amphenol connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines The table G4x16 G8x16 MBM upper RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for digital telephones on page 235 lists the wiring details for the upper RJ 21 amphenol connector and the table G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for analog PSTN lines on page 237 lists the wiring details for the lower RJ 21 amphenol connector on the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs Table 50 G4x16 G8x16 MBM upper RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for digital telephones Sheet 1 of 2 Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 1 26 Tip White Blue 253 285 1 Ring Blue White 2 27 Tip White Orange 254 286 2 Ring Orange White BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 236 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts Table 50 G4x16 G8x16 MBM upper RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for digital telephones Sheet 2 of 2
72. 20 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 Q I 120 nF Bahrain No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law Canada Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 Caribbean Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 Global No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law Hong Kong No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based mu Law BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 282 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 75 ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Call Supervision Dial Pulse Market Loop Support Transmission Interface Duration ms Duration ms Dial Ringing Min Pulse Min Min Terminal Input Frequency Max Min Coding Max Max Market profile Localized Impedance Hz Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Ireland No UK 3000 1000 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 based Q I1 220 nF Mexico No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law New Zealand No UK 300 Q 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 Based 1000 Q II 220 nF North America Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 PRC No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law Taiwan No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based mu Law United Kingdom Yes 300 Q 25
73. 20 mA minimum 65 V rms 10 20 mA minimum 65 V rms 10 20 mA minimum Battery feed voltage 48 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 29 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 48 V dc 10 FIC code OL13ABC N A N A N A N A Ringer equivalency 3 1 2 2 2 number ATA2 to BCM50 loop 135 ohms N A N A N A N A resistance cable only 800 m of 0 5 mm wire or 2600 ft of 24 AWG wire Analog loop resistance 1300 ohms 250 ohms 200 ohms 200 ohms 200 ohms on terminal side for 7200 m of 1538 m of 1231 m of 1231 m of 1231 m of voice applications 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or cable only 26000 ft of 5000 ft of 4000 ft of 4000 ft of 4000 ft of 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire Analog loop resistance 200 ohms 250 ohms 200 ohms 200 ohms 200 ohms on terminal side for 1231 m of 1538 m of 1231 m of 1231 m of 1231 m of data applications 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mm wire or 0 5 mmwire or 0 5 mm wire or cable only 4000 ft of 5000 ft of 4000 ft of 4000 ft of 4000 ft of 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire 24 AWG wire Input impedance at tip 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms and ring Return loss gt 20 dB for 200 gt 20dBfor200 gt 20dBfor200 gt 20dBfor200 gt 20 dB for 200 to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz to 3400 Hz when when when when when terminated with terminated with ter
74. 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 00 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 257 Table 61 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Ringing Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Ringing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes service trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction 000 N A 190 N A N A N A N A Service modes global 131440 overrides Restriction 0 013 0 N A filter 01 1 13 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1866 1866 1866 1866 1866 1877 1877 1877 1877 M111 a 1888 1888 1888 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 911911 411 976 411 976 411 976 411 976 411 976 1976 1976 1976 1976 1976 1378 17976 4r g76 1976 17976 1900 1900 1900 1900 1900 t290 1 900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 5551212 5551212 Restriction 00 1 13 N A N A N A N A N A N A filter 05 11 1800 Restriction i N A N A N A N A N A N A filter 06 Routing Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Routing No No No No No No No servic
75. 6 Market profile ASMB8 ASM8 GASM8 GASI CTM8 GATM8 GATM8 4X16 new GATI ADID Australia v v v v v v Bahrain V v v v Brazil v y v v CALA VKH v VK vH v v Canada v v v v y v v v v v v Caribbean NG v y v y v v v v Global vr VKH NH VH VH vv VKH VH va Vv Hong Kong VRE k va LVMH v v 4 v viv Ireland v v v Mexico V v v v v New Zealand v v v ov v v North America v v v v v v v v v v v Poland Vu v v v v v v PRC va VR v v v Taiwan v v v v v v United Kingdom Ve v v v v v v Digital interfaces The table Digital interface availability by market profile on page 246 lists the digital interfaces supported in each market profile Note that the Digital Station Interface and the BRI cNIC are onboard interfaces Table 55 Digital interface availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 Digital DSM16 station BRI Market profile DSM32 interface BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC Australia s vv wA vA vv Bahrain Vv vv vA vA vv Brazil s v y v NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 247 Table 55 Digital interface availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 Market profile DSM16 DSM32 Digital station interface BRI BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC CALA y v Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany Global Holland SENN NESSES Hong Kong lreland S Italy
76. 7 00 Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 269 Table 65 PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Ringing service Off Manual Off Manual Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction global N A N A N A N A N A 999 overrides 112 Restriction filter O 1 1800 N A N A N A 0 1 1800 0 0800 1 Service modes 01 1866 1866 1877 1888 1877 1888 911 911 911 911 411 976 411 976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 7 Default 25 Default 11 Default 25 Default 7 Default 8 0 11 00 12 00 17 0 11 00 12 0 11 00 17 01 17 01 10 01 17 1 3 118 6 011 18 02 10 011 18 9 3 1 11 411 8 02
77. 8662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Feature Codes Press OK The system ID SID displays Press NEXT Enter your sequence ID Press NEXT to scroll through the list and perform one or both of the following tasks a To activate features select Feature List e Press SHOW to view the available features e Use the soft keys to activate features for your system b To enter a new keycode select Entitlement Code e Press SHOW to view the current keycode e Use the soft keys to modify the keycode for your system For more detailed information about retrieving and entering the keycode for your system see the Keycode Installation Guide NN40170 305 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 135 To configure the IP address Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone 2 Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select IP Address Press OK Press CHNGE to modify the IP settings The display screen shows whether DHCP is enabled or disabled 6 Perform one of the following tasks a If DHCP is currently enabled e Press DIS to disable DHCP You can modify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway However these settings have no effect if the system is disabled e Press IP to mod
78. 9 e Replacing an internal component on page 195 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 176 Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components Preparing the system for maintenance Use the following procedure to prepare the system for maintenance This procedure is referenced throughout the maintenance portion of this document To shut down the system 1 2 Check for a recent backup of the BCM50 system programming If no recent backup is available then use Element Manager to back up the system data For information about backing up the system data see the Administration Guide In Element Manager from the Administration tab click the Utilities folder to expand it From the Utilities folder select Reset Click Reboot to reboot the system The BCMSO system begins the shutdown process Unplug the main unit when the status and power LEDs change from solid green to flashing orange Restarting the system after maintenance When you finish your maintenance procedure restart the BCM system in the order described in this section To return the system to operation 1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the main unit After the BCM50 starts both LEDs must be solid green If either LED is not solid green a problem with the main unit exists For a detailed description of the LED states see System status LEDs on page 61 If this system has an expansion unit check the Power and Status LEDs on the media bay module MBM
79. AR CL Ua i ee 125 To mau Te Ae 0n a WA eu 125 To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device 127 To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO nenn 127 Configuring the BCM50 system 20 cece eee eee eee 129 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 133 NEHME a ou ec lela lo a1 nern seele 134 TO coMigur ihe IP en n aieia Taan ENNER 135 TOconigure Me modem es 135 WO select Ihe reom anne 136 To select the telephony startup template and start DN sseesseeeceeeseereeeeerrrerrereernes 136 TO imiualize v l Mall ee ee 136 To create Telset user 3counE nn a 136 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 139 To acgessitne BEMSO Wob Pie ne ae 140 To download and install Element Manager 444440444nnnnHn nenne nnnonnennnnnnnnnnn nn 140 To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager uurssnesssnnennneneennnnn 140 SEHE AR ensure ee 141 To conigure the LAN IP adden 141 Toconigure Me Modo ierices aee A E EEEE EA N NEANS 142 To configure the startup template for telephony services 444444ssnnnnnennnnnnn 142 TO mnalo YORE Mea EE 143 To gmera name for your Ste 143 To configure the date and time settings an nee 143 T Garmiqure DHCP Bewer Setting ae ee 144 Tocomigure IP FPRONGS ee i NTR 145 To coniare SNMP Se MNS israe eee eee 146 Toconfigure SNMP gommunltyskinge n una 147 T c ni
80. BCM50 Main Unit i 1 25 26 50 dp a m RJ 21 telephony connector pin out m L al RJ 21 telephony connector The table RJ 21 telephony connector wiring on page 209 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 telephony connector Table 33 RJ 21 telephony connector wiring Sheet 1 of 3 Default line Device Pin Connection Wire color Type of device Port Default DN number 26 Tip White Blue 1 Analog line 061 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 Analog line 062 2 Ring Orange White 28 Tip White Green 3 nn Analog line 063 3 Ring Green White 29 Tip White Brown 4 Analog line 064 4 Ring Brown White Note The four analog lines are available only on the standard main units the analog lines are not available on the BRI series b series main units which have two BRI ports instead BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 210 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart Table 33 RJ 21 telephony connector wiring Sheet 2 of 3 Default line Device Pin Connection Wire color Type of device Port Default DN number 30 Ti White Slate 5 Analog 413 233 _ 5 Ring Slate White telephone 31 Ti Red Blue 6 p Analog 414 234 _ 6 Ring Blue Red telephone 32 Ti Red Ora
81. BCM50ba only The three ADSL router LEDs on the faceplate of the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units monitor router status data and DSL The figure ADSL router LEDs on the BCM50a and BCMS50ba main units BCM50a shown on page 65 shows the location of the three ADSL router LEDs NN40170 305 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 65 Figure 27 ADSL router LEDs on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units BCM50a shown Router status Data DSL The table ADSL router LED descriptions on page 65 describes the possible ADSL router LED states Table 10 ADSL router LED descriptions LED Status Description On The router card is functioning properly Router F status Off The router card is not ready or malfunctioned Flashing The router card is rebooting Flashing The router card is sending or receiving data through the WAN port Data Off The router card is not sending or receiving data through the WAN port On The router card is linked successfully to a digital subscriber line access multiplexer DSLAM pS Off The DSL link is not functioning Flashing The router card is initializing the DSL line Ethernet router LEDs BCM50e and BCM50be only The three Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units monitor the router status and the WAN port The figure Ethernet router LEDs on the BCM50e and BCM50be main units BCM50e shown on page
82. Blink Yellow Start up Profile executing Solid Green Solid Green Start up Profile successfully applied Blink Yellow Blink Red Start up Profile failure LAN port LEDs Each LAN port on the main unit and expansion unit has two LEDs These LEDs indicate the status of the connection for that LAN port The figure LAN port LED locations on page 64 shows the location of these LEDs on the main units and expansion unit Note The expansion ports on the main unit also function as LAN ports The expansion port LEDs indicate LAN activity only The LEDs do not indicate expansion unit presence The LEDs do not light BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 64 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs Figure 26 LAN port LED locations LAN port Ty e we J LAN port LEDs Expansion port Router card LAN ports FF if NERTEL ji BCMBOa Expansion LAN ports The table LAN port and expansion port LED indicators on page 64 describes the possible LED states for the LAN ports LEDs Table 9 LAN port and expansion port LED indicators LED Status Description Yellow On The LAN port is operating at 10 Mb s Green On The LAN port is operating at 100 Mb s Both LEDs Off No connection Any LED Flashing The LAN port is sending or receiving network data The frequency of the flashes increases with increased traffic ADSL router LEDs BCM50a and
83. CM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 218 Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart Table 37 RJ 11 WAN port wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Pin Signal Tip No connection No connection Table 38 RJ 45 WAN port wiring Pin Signal 1 Receive Data Rx Receive Data Rx Transmit Data Tx No connection No connection Transmit Data Tx No connection oN OJIA AJOJN No connection NN40170 305 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart 219 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart Two of the four RJ 45 connectors on the BCM50 BCM50a BCM50e BCM50b BCMS50ba and BCM50be main units are designated as expansion ports See the figure Expansion ports on a BCMS0 and an expansion unit on page 219 These ports connect to an expansion unit or connect network devices to the LAN Figure 91 Expansion ports on a BCM50 and an expansion unit BCM50 main unit Expansion LAN Expansion LAN port 2 port 3 87654321 Expansion unit ATT Expansion port pin out The table Expansion port wiring on page 219 lists the wiring details for the expansion ports Expansion port Table 39 Expansion port wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Pin Signal 1 Ethernet Receive Data Ethernet Receive Data Ethernet Transmit Data FS256 Transmit Da
84. Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites Before you install a main unit or expansion unit perform the following tasks Determine the location for the BCM50 units telephones and other equipment based on space and electrical requirements Order the required trunks from the central office Ensure that you have all the equipment and supplies you need to install the system For information about BCM50 installation prerequisites Environmental requirements on page 79 Electrical requirements on page 79 Site telephony wiring requirements on page 80 System equipment supplies and tools on page 81 Environmental requirements Ensure you meet the installation environmental requirements The installation area must be a minimum of 4 m 13 ft from equipment such as photocopiers electrical motors and other equipment that produces electromagnetic radio frequency and electrostatic interference within 1 5 m 5 ft of a three wire grounded electrical outlet clean dry well ventilated and free of traffic and excess dust within the temperature range of 5 C and 50 C 40 F and 120 F from 20 to 80 non condensing relative humidity structurally strong and with enough space to support the BCM50 units a minimum of 46 cm 18 in from the floor gt Note The installation area must be of sufficient height from the floor to prevent water damage Electrical requirements Ensure you meet the following electrical
85. Dar nk eee x 53 Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure 0000eeeeees 54 SOI E e E an era E E er 54 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 12 Contents BCMS0 COMPONSE neu 54 owe SURI sc Lee SRLS ROR ERO OR oe 55 Power supply adapter cord international users 0 00 e eee eee 55 Uninterruptable power supply Hu nnsae seen nennen een en 55 FAW GIG ara een Freiherr 4 Soe MERI TRE ge els 56 COMI re ee EI SUITE EEE NEN 57 RJ 21 telephony CONNGCION sso ccc eee e ieee ee eke ede EEE ee 58 OWE EI ch cease tee eet Aa rl 59 Fieldrepl ssablB UNIS ua pads aiden aced a tebe ee Esl eee ewes 59 DOREEN os 4s hig 24 5S 904 OSES eier 60 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 0 cee eee eee eens 61 Systeam status LEDS 2 gnascs peda beua tide keeRoGae eens an eie Manmade eens 61 LAN pon LEDS 22 pense oka Ree er ee en 63 ADSL router LEDs BCM50a and BCM50ba only 2 222222 nennen nn 64 Ethernet router LEDs BCM50e and BCM50be only 0 00000 eee 65 BRI port LEDs on main unit BRI series only 0000 0c eee eee eee 67 Media bay module LEDs expansion units only 2 2 22m essen een 67 DIM LES asien erahnen 68 BEINIDEDE usw ee a au ae arg Seca ele 69 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 71 BCM50 and BCM50b main units no integrated router 2222222 71 If an external DHCP server is not present 2
86. Green ini 23 Da 403 223 2 23 Ring Green Violet telephone 49 Ti Violet Brown ini e4 P Digital 402 229 24 Ring Brown Violet telephone 50 Ti Violet Slate jai 25 P ae 401 221 25 Ring Slate Violet telephone BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 212 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart NN40170 305 Appendix B BRI wiring chart 213 Appendix B BRI wiring chart The digital BRI ISDN lines connects to the BCMS50b BCM50ba and BCMS50be main units through the BRI ports RJ 45 on the front of the main units See the figure BRI ports and pin out BCM50b shown on page 213 The figure BRI ports and pin out BCM50b shown on page 213 the table BRI port wiring on page 213 and the table BRI line numbering on page 214 apply to S Loop and T Loop connections S Loop are used to connect S Loop devices such as video phones terminal adapters and Grp 3 Fax machines The T Loops are used to connect to the CO PSTN Warning For a U loop connection the BRI port must be connected only to an NT1 A provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Figure 88 BRI ports and pin out BCM50b shown BRI ports N RTEL BCMbOb G 57954221 BRI port pin out The table BRI port wiring on page 213 and the table BRI line numbering on page 214 l
87. ICES 003 CLASS A Canadian EMI Requirements Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference Telecommunication registration BCMSO equipment meets all applicable requirements of both Industry Canada CS 03 and US Federal Communications Commission FCC Part 68 and has been registered under files Industry Canada 332D 5980A and FCC US AB6KF15B20705 key system US AB6MF15B20706 hybrid system and US AB6PF15B23740 PBX system Connection of the BCM50 telephone system to the nationwide telecommunications network is made through a standard network interface jack that you can order from your local telecommunications company This type of customer provided equipment cannot be used on party lines or coin lines BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 26 Regulatory information Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or altera
88. IM wiring chart Table 43 BRIM line numbering Port number Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 1 065 066 095 096 2 067 068 097 098 3 069 070 099 100 4 071 072 101 02 NN40170 305 Appendix H ADID wiring chart 225 Appendix H ADID wiring chart Analog telephone lines connect to the ADID4 or ADID8 through the RJ 21 connector on the front of the media bay module MBM See the figure ADID RJ 21 connector on page 225 Figure 94 ADID RJ 21 connector ADID RJ 21 connector RJ 21 pin out The table ADID4 and ADID8 RJ 21 connector wiring on page 225 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the ADID4 and ADID8 Use the first four lines for the ADID4 and use all eight lines for the ADID8 Table 44 ADID4 and ADID8 RJ 21 connector wiring Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 26 Tip 1 065 095 1 Ring 27 Tip 2 066 096 2 Ring 28 Tip 3 067 097 3 Ring 29 Tip 4 068 098 4 Ring 30 Tip 5 073 103 5 Ring 31 Tip 6 074 104 6 Ring 32 Tip 7 075 105 7 Ring 33 Tip 8 076 106 8 Ring BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 226 Appendix H ADID wiring chart NN40170 305 Appendix GATM wiring chart Appendix GATM wiring chart Analog telephone lines connect to the GATM4
89. IP address in the Manager IP Address field Click OK Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add another manager IP address To create user accounts From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it From the Administrator Access folder select Accounts and Privileges Select the View by Accounts tab A OND Click Add to add a user account The Add Account dialog box appears 5 Configure the Add Account attributes See the table Add Account attributes on page 148 Table 29 Add Account attributes Attribute Description Description Enter a description for this account User ID Enter a descriptive name for the user or the user function Password Enter a password for this account Telset user ID numeric If the user performs administration through the Telset interface enter a number for the user ID Telset password numeric Enter a password for the Telset User ID Modem Callback Number If Callback is required enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial up user access Modem Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm the callback is legitimate ISDN Callback Number If ISDN Callback is required enter the number to which the system calls back to verify the dial up user access ISDN Callback Passcode This is the code the system uses to confirm that the ISDN callback is legitimate Change Password On Login Select this check bo
90. ISDN INS Services ara ee eins Eea aud 287 Analog and digital trunk types u 2 20 2 0 een deme 287 NEX eee ee eT eT rere Tr er re n 291 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 18 Contents NN40170 305 New in this release 19 New in this release The following sections detail what s new in Business Communications Manager 50 Installation and Maintenance for release 5 0 e Features on page 19 Features This release contains no new features BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 20 New in this release NN40170 305 21 Regulatory information For regulatory information about the BCM50 system e North American regulatory information e International regulatory information on page 26 North American regulatory information This Class A device complies with Part 68 and Part 15 of the FCC Rules and ICES 003 Class A Canadian EMI requirements Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own pro
91. M installed in the expansion unit To connect telephone lines to DTM BRIM or 4x16 MBMs 1 2 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 111 Obtain a telephone cable that has a modular plug that matches the MBM to which you are connecting RJ 48C for DTM e RJ 45 for BRIM e RJ 11 for 4x16 Plug the modular cable into the jack in the front of the MBM Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building If you connect telephone lines to a 4x16 or BRIM repeat steps 2 to 4 for each line Warning If the network ISDN is a U loop you must connect the BRIM only to an NT1 provided by the service provider The NT1 must provide a Telecommunication Network Voltage TNV to Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV barrier Note Do not attempt to plug digital equipment into the auxiliary AUX jacks on the Ed front of 4x16 MBM 6 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou connect a 4x16 MBM go to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 for instruction about wiring the extensions for this MBM e If your BCMSO system has another expansion unit repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines or proceed to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 if you add extensions BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 114 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system e If your BCMS0 system has no other expansion unit
92. M4 227 default on GATM8 228 default on main unit 209 default on telephony connector 209 line services ISDN support by region 287 lines BRI and PRI line types 287 main unit 37 BCMS0 37 BCMS50a 38 BCMS0b 38 BCM50ba 38 BCMS50be 38 BCMS0e 38 default DNs 209 default line numbers 209 installing 83 installing desktop 93 installing equipment rack 84 installing wallmount 88 standard series 37 wiring chart 215 217 219 maximum loss ATA2 126 MBM 42 configuring 158 default DNs 232 243 default line numbers 221 224 228 232 235 installing 102 overview 44 replacing 185 switches 98 wiring chart 221 223 227 231 235 239 243 media bay modules availability by regions 245 music on hold copyright 24 music source permission 24 wiring on telephony connector 210 N network equipment registration 25 networking WAN card 59 Nortel distributor 35 North American components 48 O output jack 58 P page output wiring 210 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 294 Index page relay wiring 210 page external paging amplifier 58 paging 58 external output jack description 58 relay jack description 58 patch panel 87 peripherals ATA2 121 power supply replacing 177 PRI DTM module 45 line types 287 R radio frequency interference 25 regions ISDN line services support 287 modules 245 system defaults 255 regulatory information 2 related publications 33 relay ja
93. M50 main unit Loading the Startup Profile adds approximately 5 minutes to the time for the BCM50 system to boot After you successfully apply the Startup Profile the BCM50 system automatically reboots to complete the BCM50 system configuration After the BCM50 system reboots the Startup Profile is fully loaded The figure Overview of using the Startup Profile on page 151 shows an overview of using the Startup Profile Figure 62 Overview of using the Startup Profile Use the Startup Profile to set the basic parameters Check the prerequisites Customize a Startup Profile for your system Load the Startup Profile onto the system BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 152 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters Note You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file system If necessary reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into the USB port of your computer right clicking the USB device icon and selecting FAT32 reformatting This destroys any data on the USB Note The Startup Profile works only on a BCM50 system with no keycodes loaded After the keycodes are loaded the Startup Profile does not work This condition prevents unintentional overwriting of the parameters of a configured system For information about setting the initial parameters on the BCM50 system e Startup Profile requirements on page 152 e Configuring basic parameters on page
94. Min Min Min Coding Level Market Min Min Min Max Min Coding Max Max Interdigit Scheme A profile Seize Answer Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Pause digits dBm0 Brazil 200 50 250 1100 750 N 40 90 15 55 250 16 25 CALA 200 50 250 1100 750 N 40 90 15 55 250 16 25 Denmark 200 50 80 140 750 N 15 200 15 200 200 16 25 France 140 50 220 320 225 N 60 75 25 40 800 16 25 Germany 150 50 80 120 225 N 50 70 30 50 650 16 25 Holland 200 50 90 130 750 N 30 70 25 80 400 16 25 Italy 150 50 80 140 225 N 50 70 30 50 700 16 25 Norway 200 50 80 150 750 N 30 70 25 80 400 16 40 Poland 200 50 25 150 750 N 40 90 20 60 300 16 25 Spain 150 50 80 140 225 N 60 75 25 40 450 16 25 Sweden 200 50 30 150 125 N 1 30 70 25 80 450 16 28 Switzerland 150 50 80 140 225 N 50 70 30 50 350 16 25 Voicemail The following voicemail parameter values are the same for all countries AMIS Address Start Key Country Key Language Toggle 9 Country Key Operator Revert 0 Maximum CLID Entry 16 Maximum Network DN Length 16 Maximum Packet Network DN Length 8 Broadcast Key Event 9 See the table Voicemail parameters by country on page 285for the remaining voicemail parameters NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 285 Table 78 Voicemail parameters by country Sheet 1 of 2 Country Login Alternate Enable Local Maximum National Mailbox QZ Default Touch
95. N connections and one OAM port On the BCM50a BCMS50e BCM50ba and BCM50be main units six RJ 45 connectors support LAN connections and one OAM port The figure Ports on a BCM50e main unit on page 162 shows the location of the LAN ports Figure 66 Ports on a BCM50e main unit Router card LAN ports port 0 port 1 LAN ports ports 2 3 Note On units with an integrated ADSL modem the WAN port is an RJ 11 port with additional LEDs The table LAN ports on the main unit on page 162 describes the function of each port Table 30 LAN ports on the main unit Sheet 1 of 2 Port name Function OAM port The OAM port connects an on site management computer to the main unit Using this connection you can access management tools such as Element Manager without affecting the main LAN This port is not connected to the network switch built into the main unit and cannot be connected to other network devices LAN port The LAN port connects the main unit to the LAN This port connects to the network switch built into the main unit Expansion LAN The expansion ports have two purposes connecting the expansion units and providing ports LAN access to other network devices If an expansion unit is connected to the port the expansion port provides signaling channels media channels and LAN datagrams to the expansion unit The expansion unit connects the signaling and media channels
96. Not Not supported 425 Hz 250 supported supported ms On 250 ms Off BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 276 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 69 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 2 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone New Zealand ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported 500 ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear North America Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Poland ETSI Not No Supported in Supported Supported Not Not supported unsupervised in supported supported mode supervised 425 Hz 500 mode ms On 500 ms ff PRC Bellcore Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not A C 450 25 Hz supported supported don 350 ms On 350 u ff 10 GATI or MS SME 10 Legacy GATM4 8 Russia ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 50 Hz Supported Supported 400 ms On 400 ms Off 100ms South Africa ETSI Not No Supportedin Yes Supported Not Not supported Supervised Supported Supported Supported Mode 400 in 25 Hz Supervised 500 ms On 500 Mode ms Off 100ms Spain ETSI Not No No Yes Supported Not Not supported Supported Supported Supported in
97. Number CLID Number Market Key Mapping Language Tone Gate Length Display Length Argentina 8 YES Spanish NO 8 16 12 Australia 8 YES Australian NO 8 8 9 English Austria YES German NO 7 16 11 Bahrain 7 YES Arabic NO 6 16 6 Brazil wa YES North NO 8 8 10 American English Cala YES Spanish NO 8 8 8 Caribbean ae NO North NO 7 7 10 American English Chile 8 YES Spanish NO 7 16 11 Columbia 8 YES Spanish NO 7 16 12 Czech YES Czech NO 7 16 11 Denmark 8 YES Danish NO 8 8 11 Finland 8 YES Finnish NO 9 16 11 France 8 YES Euro French NO 7 7 14 Germany 8 YES German NO 7 7 11 Global 8 YES North NO 7 16 11 American English Holland 8 YES Dutch NO 7 7 11 Hong Kong NO North NO 11 9 10 American English India YES United NO 7 16 14 Kingdom English Indonesia i YES United NO 7 16 10 Kingdom English lreland YES United NO 7 16 10 Kingdom English Italy 8 YES Italian NO 7 7 11 Malaysia YES United NO 8 16 10 Kingdom English Mexico i YES Spanish NO 7 16 10 New 8 YES Australian NO 7 16 8 Zealand English North NO North NO 7 16 10 America American English BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 286 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 78 Voicemail parameters by country Sheet 2 of 2 Country Login Alternate Enable Local Maximum National Mailbox QZ Default Touch Number CLID Number Mark
98. Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction global N A N A 999 N A N A 112 overrides 112 990 Restriction filter N A 0 0 0800 1 0 N A N A Service modes 01 1 1800 1 1800 1866 1866 1877 1888 1877 1888 911 911 911 911 411 976 411 976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A 010 1 00 N A N A N A Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 25 Default 7 DD Default 7 Default 25 Default 7 0 11 0 11 2 7 0 11 00 12 1 3 118 6 00 12 01 17 9 3 01 17 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable N A Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable 7 Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable 10 Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto None Auto Auto Auto Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None 0 Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detec
99. RTEL NETWORKS THROUGH A NORTEL NETWORKS AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WITHIN FIVE 5 DAYS OF YOUR ACQUISITION OF Subject to the terms hereinafter set forth NORTEL NETWORKS grants to CUSTOMER and or its representatives with a need to know a personal non exclusive license 1 to use the licensed software proprietary to NORTEL NETWORKS or its suppliers and 2 to use the associated documentation CUSTOMER is granted no title or ownership rights in or to the licensed software in whole or in part and CUSTOMER acknowledges that title to and all copyrights patents trade secrets and or any other intellectual property rights to and in all such licensed software and associated documentation are and shall remain the property of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers The right to use licensed software may be restricted by a measure of usage of applications based upon number of lines number of ports number of terminal numbers assigned number of users or some similar measure Expansion beyond the specified usage level may require payment of an incremental charge or another license fee NORTEL NETWORKS considers the licensed software to contain trade secrets of NORTEL NETWORKS and or its suppliers Such trade secrets include without limitation thereto the specific design structure and logic of individual licensed software programs their interactions with other portions of licensed software both internal and external and the p
100. Remove the USB storage device from the USB port on the BCM50 or the USB hub Note Make sure the bootup sequence is complete before removing the USB storage device from the BCM50 system 5 Connect the 25 pair cable to the RJ 21 telephony connector on the BCMS0 main unit The Startup Profile is now loaded on your BCM50 system Next step After you load the Startup Profile you can connect the data networking cables For information about connecting these cables see Completing the initial installation optional on page 157 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 156 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters NN40170 305 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation optional 157 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation optional This section provides information about completing the initial installation of your BCM50 system These options are described for informative purposes only The figure Overview of completing the initial installation on page 157 shows an overview of completing the initial installation Figure 63 Overview of completing the initial installation Complete the initial installation Configure media bay module s Configure modem settings Check for software updates Configure voicemail Customize security policies Perform a backup BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 158 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation
101. Ring Brown White 30 Tip White Slate 5 257 289 5 Ring Slate White 31 Tip Red Blue 6 258 290 6 Ring Blue Red 32 Tip Red Orange 7 259 291 7 Ring Orange Red 33 Tip Red Green 8 260 292 8 Ring Green Red 34 Tip Red Brown 9 261 293 9 Ring Brown Red NN40170 305 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts 233 Table 49 4x16 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 35 Tip Red Slate 10 262 294 10 Ring Slate Red 36 Tip Black Blue 11 263 295 11 Ring Blue Black 37 Tip Black Orange 12 264 296 12 Ring Orange Black 38 Tip Black Green 13 265 297 13 Ring Green Black 39 Tip Black Brown 14 266 298 14 Ring Brown Black 40 Tip Black Slate 15 267 299 15 Ring Slate Black 41 Tip Yellow Blue 16 268 300 16 Ring Blue Yellow 42 Noconnection Yellow Orange 17 No connection Orange Yellow 50 Noconnection Violet Slate 25 Noconnection Slate Violet BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 234 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts NN40170 305 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts 235 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts You can connect 4 or 8 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the G4x16 or G8x16 media bay module MBM The analog telephones lines connect to the G4x16 or G8x
102. See Market profile attributes on page 245 for supported regions Digital station media bay module The digital station media bay modules DSM support digital telephones on the BCM50 system This section describes the DSM16 and DSM32 media bay modules See the figure DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors on page 48 The digital station media bay modules have the following characteristics e DSM16 supports 16 digital telephones through one RJ 21 connector e DSM 32 supports 32 digital telephones through two RJ 21 connectors Figure 14 DSM faceplate LEDs and connectors DSM 16 DSM16 e lel ee Power Status Status Power 4x16 media bay module The 4x16 MBM provides both analog trunk connections and digital telephone connections This MBM provides connections for four analog trunk lines and 16 digital telephones Each of the four analog trunk lines support Caller ID and disconnect supervision You can use an analog telephony device such as a modem fax or telephone to share the trunk through the Aux port beside Line 1 The figure 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the 4x16 MBM The 4x16 MBM has one RJ 21 connector and five RJ 11 connectors on the faceplate NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 49 Figure 15 4x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors heel 4X16 AMELE Power Status Line1 Modem Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 G4x16 and G8x16 media ba
103. Smart family for example UPS Smart 750 and UPS Smart 1000 and UPS Back family for example UPS Back 500 ES and UPS Back 350 ES You can use the UPS control software to configure various operational settings Note For the UPS to function correctly you must connect it before you power up the BCM50 system If you connect a UPS to a running system the UPS does not function The USB port on the UPS uses a different communication speed than the USB port on the BCM50 system Due to this difference you must use an industry standard USB hub USB 1 1 compatible to connect the UPS data connection to the BCM50 system The USB hub not only provides additional USB ports it converts the data communication speed so the UPS and BCMS0 system can communicate properly On BCMS0 systems with more than one unit you must connect the power supplies for all the units must to a single UPS The interaction between the UPS and the BCM50 occurs in three stages 1 Configuration This stage sends configuration information to the UPS device and requires minimal user interaction 2 Monitoring This stage is a steady state periodic monitoring cycle where the BCM50 reads the status of the UPS This stage requires minimal user interaction 3 Failure condition This stage initiates an action when a threshold value is surpassed The BCMSO system requires user interaction in the case of a planned system shutdown You must manually power down the UPS and the
104. The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts with the NTP server 1 XXXX Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP server NTP security mode Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or unsecured Raise alarm if clock differs by at least s The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must occur before the system notifies you of a time difference from the NTP server if the system automatically checks with the NTP server NTP key ID ID for accessing the NTP NTP key string Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP Date and time Use the calendar to select the correct date and time Time zone Select the time zone for this system To configure DHCP server settings Warning If you have a main unit with an integrated router you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to use the DHCP server on the main unit Select DHCP Server A WO N do one of the following From the Configuration tab click the Data Services folder to expand it Select the General Settings tab If you have a main unit with an integrated router BCM50a BCMS50e BCM50ba BCM50be e Select the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the integrated router The DHCP server on the main unit will be disabled Click Launch Router WebGUI tool to launch the router configuration tool For information about using
105. WAS A MATERIAL FACTOR IN THE ESTABLISHMENT OF THE LICENSE FEE CHARGED FOR EACH SPECIFIC ITEM OF SOFTWARE LICENSED IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS AND OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS AND THEIR DIRECTORS OFFICERS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS BE LIABLE TO OR THROUGH CUSTOMER FOR INCIDENTAL INDIRECT SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING LOST PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR BUSINESS INFORMATION BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR OTHER ECONOMIC DAMAGE AND FURTHER INCLUDING INJURY TO PROPERTY AS A RESULT OF USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY OR OTHER TERM OF THIS LICENSE REGARDLESS OF WHETHER NORTEL NETWORKS AND OR NORTEL NETWORKS SUPPLIERS WERE ADVISED HAD OTHER REASON TO KNOW OR IN FACT KNEW OF THE POSSIBILITY THEREOF Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Right in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauses in DFARS 252 227 7013 c 1 ii and FAR 52 227 19 c 2 as applicable NN40170 305 The rights and obligations arising under this License shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Tennessee If for any reason a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision of this License or portion thereof to be unenforceable that provision of the License shall be enforced to the maximum extent permissible so as to effect the intent of the parties and the remainde
106. a and BCM50e main units You can use these ports to connect additional devices to the LAN Note 1 These ports are not available on the BCM50 main unit Note 2 The BCM50 Release 1 hardware has three additional LAN RJ 45 ports BRI ports BCM50b series only Two RJ 45 jacks that provide connections for BRI trunks from the Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN On the BCM50b series main units the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector are not available Note The BRI ports feature is activated by selecting this feature when you generate your keycode If you do not purchase this feature the BRI ports are unavailable Reset switch A button to activate the reset feature Use a long thin tool to press the button Warning The reset feature erases programming information use the feature with care Music source port A phono jack used to connect a music source to the main unit If you use this port the music source connections on the RJ 21 telephony connector are disabled USB port A USB 1 1 compatible port used to connect a USB storage device or the data interface for an uninterruptable power supply UPS to the main unit The main unit uses the data interface for the UPS to monitor and control the UPS functions To connect both a USB storage device and a UPS data interface an industry standard USB hub USB 1 1 compatible is required Note You must format the USB storage device for the FAT32 file
107. a speeds When the line is in use by an analog device the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use If you try to seize the line using the phone the display shows in use Also if a power failure occurs an analog set on line 1 activates powered by the CO The table GATM8 RJ 21 connector wiring on page 228 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the GATM8 Table 46 GATM8 Ru 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 26 Tip White Blue 1 065 095 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 066 096 2 Ring Orange White 28 No connection White Green 3 No connection Green White 29 No connection White Brown 4 No connection Brown White 30 Tip White Slate 3 067 097 5 Ring Slate White 31 Tip Red Blue 4 068 098 6 Ring Blue Red 32 No connection Red Orange 7 No connection Orange Red 33 No connection Red Green 8 No connection Green Red 34 Tip Red Brown 5 073 103 9 Ring Brown Red 35 Tip Red Slate 6 074 104 10 Ring Slate Red 36 No connection Black Blue 11 No connection Blue Black 37 No connection Black Orange 12 No connection Orange Black NN40170 305 Appendix GATM wiring chart 229 Table 46 GATM3 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 o
108. ace Ringing Frequency 20 20 20 20 20 Hz Ringing Amplitude 63 63 63 63 63 Vrms Loop Current Detect 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 Threshold mA Loop Current Limit 26 26 26 26 26 mA Call Minimum Seize 200 200 200 200 200 Supervision Duration ms Minimum Answer 10 10 10 10 10 Duration ms Minimum Maximum 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 Recall Duration ms Minimum Clear 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 Duration ms Disconnect 800 800 800 800 800 Supervision OSI Time ms Dial Pulse Dial Pulse Coding N N N N N Scheme Minimum Maximum 25 120 25 120 25 120 25 120 25 120 Break Duration ms Minimum Maximum 10 90 10 90 10 90 10 90 10 90 Make Duration ms Minimum Interdigit 250 250 250 250 250 Pause Duration ms DTMF DTMF Coding 16 16 16 16 16 Scheme digits Min DTMF Detect 27 27 27 27 27 Level A dBm MWI High Voltage HV Supported Supported Supported Supported 95V Supported 95V 95V 95V 95V Line Reversal LR Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Tone Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Class MWI Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported FSK Support Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 281 Table 74 GASI parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Market Profile Aspect Parameter Canada Caribbean Global H
109. ake a call to another extension on the system If this system has an expansion unit with a media bay module MBM that supports extensions repeat steps 3 and 4 for an extension connected to the expansion unit Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the main unit Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs Check for a dial tone Make a call using the line or line pool If this system has an expansion unit with an MBM that supports lines repeat steps 6 to 8 with an extension that can access one of the lines connected to the expansion unit BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 168 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality To troubleshoot the main unit If a test fails use the following procedure 1 2 Verify that any nonfunctional feature is included in your installed keycode Check the wiring to the main unit and to the MBMs Make sure that the cables are properly seated and are connected to the correct ports Reboot the BCM50 system Check LEDs see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61 Use Element Manager or the Telset Administration feature to check the programming for the lines or extensions that failed the call test If the programming is incorrect use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming If a recent backup is not available correct the programming using Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature To test the expan
110. al BCM50 network switch to connect another IP device to the LAN connect an Ethernet cable between the IP device and one of the additional LAN ports on the BCM50 system Router card LAN ports Expansion port or expansion unit LAN port Repeat step 3 for each IP device you want to connect to the LAN using the BCM50 switch If you install a BCM50a or BCMS50e proceed to Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 163 If you install a BCM50 proceed to Next step on page 165 Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN Four types of main units contain a router card the BCM50a BCMS50e BCMS50ba and BCMS50be On the BCM50e and BCM50be the WAN port is an RJ 45 port On the BCM50a and BCM50ba the WAN port is an RJ 11 port The figure WAN port on a BCM50 main unit on page 164 shows the location of the WAN port on both types of router cards BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 164 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN Figure 67 WAN port on a BCM50 main unit BCM50a main unit For information about connecting the BCM50 to the WAN To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN on page 164 To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN on page 164 To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN 1 4 Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50e and BCM50be main
111. all hardware components The tables provide references to the component descriptions and installation procedures Note The product engineering code PEC can change over time consult the catalog for the latest information Table 6 Field replaceable units Component description FRU Description Replacement procedure Router card with Ethernet connector Router card Router card with ADSL interface Replacing an internal component Router card Replacing an internal component Hard disk programmed Hard disk Replacing an internal component Power supply Power supply Replacing a power supply Cooling fan Cooling fan Table 7 Media bay modules Sheet 1 of 2 Replacing an internal component Component description FRU Description Installation procedure 4x16 MBM 4x16 media bay module To install an MBM Analog DID Analog direct inward dialing media To install an MBM bay module ASM8 MBM Analog station media bay modules To install an MBM BRIM MBM Basic rate interface media bay To install an MBM module DSM16 MBM Digital station media bay module To install an MBM DSM32 MBM Digital station media bay module To install an MBM DTM MBM Digital trunk media bay module To install an MBM BCMS50 Installation and
112. alog phone to test the ATA2 2 Check the following connections a ATA to the terminal The resistance must be 200 ohms or less for data applications and 1300 ohms or less for voice applications b BCM50 hardware to the ATA2 The wiring must be equivalent to 800 m of 0 5 mm wire 2600 ft of 24 A WG or less Do not use bridge taps and loading coils between the BCMS0 hardware and ATA2 Reset to factory settings This section describes how to reset the BCM50 system to the factory settings or a stable working condition using the reset switch see the figure Reset switch location on page 171 When the BCM5S0 is in this condition you can make further modifications Figure 68 Reset switch location NEIRTEL BCMbO 19 De ra TA re TEE Reset switch Some possible situations in which you use the reset feature are e If the BCM50 system is configured incorrectly to an extent that it is no longer functional The customer must use a level 1 reset to return to the default system programming and restore a previous configuration or reconfigure the system e If distributors want to reuse BCM50 systems they must first erase all customer specific data using a level 1 or level 2 reset Reset levels Reset to factory settings is a stand alone feature that has the following levels of reset e Level 1 reset erases all customer specific data and restores the default configur
113. an expansion UNH ccccscveceresavesieeateereeereewnes 97 Unpacking ihe expansion unit zus ieee ee eee eee ede eee ee a 98 Verifying the media bay module switch settings 2 0 20000 eee eee 98 Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit 22200005 102 Installing ihe expansion Wl erst dans etiketat woe eran Meee RES 103 DERSIER siert 103 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 2 0000 105 Connecting the expansion unit 2ssciasccekawiacseeaaeceenweteseraaatass 106 Connecting the Powersupply sccecdiceceacekateepanesed re 108 Connecting the lines and extensions 00000 cence ee 110 API ROIS aes gcc ree Sana wee Se Eee eS Leste eye tore Seed 111 Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector 112 Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units 00000 113 Connecting extensions to the expansion units 00 000 eee 114 Connecting the auxiliary equipment 00 c eee 115 Connecting an auxiliary ringer assssascsdaes ee eesc aka 116 Connecting an external paging system 2 0 00 c eee eee 116 Connecting an external music SOUrCe 1 ee 117 MEISTE sense 120 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals 000e eee eens 121 Systemi telephone onc ic aks detec e cer rear 121 Analog Terminal adapter 2 aus eee es be kha ee anhe oes axe dba es 121 Installing an emergency telephone os c2ccsecesceees
114. ance Guide 28 Regulatory information Expansion Unit BRIM ST configuration Expansion Unit ADID4 ADID8 Direct Inward Dial Expansion Unit R2MFC The following interfaces are designated as Safety Extra Low Voltage SELV and cannot be connected to unprotected plant wiring BCMS0 CSC Page Port BCM50 CSC Auxiliary Ringer Port BCM50 CSC Music On Hold Port BCMS0 CSC Relay Port BCM5S0 CSC USB Port BCM5S0 CSC Ethernet Port including optional Ethernet Hub Ports ITU standardization compliance The following list provides voice data applications and telephony support for BCM50 3 0 G 711 and G 729AB codecs V 27ter V 29 and V 17 data modem modulation supported T 38 fax control gateway G3 fax T512 1 Type 1 Receiver DTMF G 168 H 323 Q 931 NN40170 305 29 Chapter 1 Getting started About this guide The BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide describes how to install configure and maintain the Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3 0 BCM50 3 0 systems The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the hardware of the BCM50 system This guide provides task based information about installing the hardware components and performing basic configuration tasks Use Nortel Business Element Manager Startup Profile and Telset Administration to configure various BCM50 parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e installing hardware components e
115. and Maintenance Guide 50 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware e Enhanced ringing capability ASM8 and GASM provide a ringing voltage of 2 REN 65 V rms per port e The GASMS is designated as an on premise station ONS port This device provides telecommunications ringing voltages and can be configured to provide voltage message waiting indicator VMWI voltage levels Installation of this device and all connections to this device must be performed by qualified telecommunications service personnel who are aware of the hazards associated with telecommunications wiring and are aware of the local regulations for treatment of telecommunications wiring for ONS deployment e Disconnect supervision Open Switch Interval OSI as per EIA TIA 464 indicates to the attached device in an established communication that the connected device releases the call Disconnect supervision note When disconnect happens from the Central Office CO the ASM8 provides an open switch interval OSI to the off hook station of 850 milliseconds ms TIA EIA 464 section 5 4 10 2 4 minimum is 600 ms as a disconnect signal If the station remains on hook after the disconnect signal the ASM68 disconnects the station equipment from the network without returning a tone TIA EIA 464 section 5 4 10 2 5 1 After the station equipment goes on hook the ASM8 station interface is restored to on hook idle You must ensure the device application or interface
116. ard touches the bezel Align the card connector on the router card with the connector on the Compact Services Card CSC Gently press down on the back of the router card to seat the router card in the connector on the CSC Use the three screws you removed in the procedure To remove the router card on page 201 to secure the Router card to the CSC e Caution Use only the original screws to secure the Router card Using other screws can interfere with proper installation 7 Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 206 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component Closing the main unit case To close the main unit case 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Place the top of the case on top of the main unit case Make sure the side edges of the case are aligned and the front of the top is back about 1 cm 3 8 in 3 Slide the top of the case forward until it clicks in place See the figure Replacing the top of the case on page 206 Figure 86 Replacing the top of the case Turn the main unit over so you can access the screws holes on the bottom of the unit Insert the three case screws in the back of the unit and tighten them For the location of the screws see the figure BCMSO case screws on page 197 Caution Use only the screws that you remo
117. are not available on the BRI series b series main units Four analog telephones Use these connections for analog telephony devices such as single line telephones fax machines and modems Auxiliary ringer Use this connection for an auxiliary ringer customer supplied The BCM50 system uses the auxiliary ringer to control the cadence of an auxiliary ringer You must use this output in a low current low voltage application only Do not use this output for switching the auxiliary ringer directly Page output Use this connection to connect an internally generated voice paging signal to an external paging amplifier customer supplied Page relay When you use the page output to connect an external paging amplifier you also use the page relay The page relay connects to a floating relay contact pair The BCM50 system uses the page relay to control the external paging amplifier Music input Use the Music input to connect an external music source that supplies a signal to held lines music on hold or telephone speakers background music The input source can be any available radio or music source approved for connection to the network If you use this connection do not use the Music input jack on the main unit faceplate Twelve digital telephones Use these connections for digital telephones For a list of digital telephones that are compatible with the BCM50 system see the Telephony Device Installation Guide N Warning External eq
118. as 4 LAN ports one is the OAM port for technicians and the other three are for basic LAN connectivity See the figure BCM50 main unit ports and connectors on page 39 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 38 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware BCM50a main unit with ADSL router The BCM50a main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit and it has an integrated ADSL router for advanced data applications For detailed configuration information see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide See the figure BCM50a main unit ports and connectors on page 39 BCM50e main unit with Ethernet router The BCM50e main unit provides all the same core functionality as the BCM50 main unit and it has an integrated Ethernet router for advanced data applications For detailed configuration information see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide See the figure BCM50e main unit ports and connectors on page 39 e BRI series b series available only in EMEA and APAC regions BCM50b main unit The BCM50b main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50 main unit The difference is that the BCM50b main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector See the figure BCM50b main unit ports and connectors on page 40 BCM50ba main unit with ADSL router The BCM50ba main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50a main unit The
119. as an integrated router then you can activate either the DHCP server on the main unit or the DHCP server on the integrated router If you want to use the DHCP server on the main unit you must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router For more information about configuring the DHCP server see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 144 The BCMS50 system can have a main unit with or without an integrated router e BCM50 and BCM50b main units no integrated router on page 71 e BCM50a BCM50ba BCM50e and BCM50be main units with integrated router on page 72 BCM50 and BCM50b main units no integrated router By default the main unit is configured with a dynamic IP address which means the IP configuration is received from a DHCP server The BCMS50 and BCM50b main units can have two DHCP server configurations e Ifan external DHCP server is not present on page 71 e Ifan external DHCP server is present on page 72 If an external DHCP server is not present If an external DHCP server is not present then the main unit uses the following default IP configuration IP address 192 168 1 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 The DHCP server on the main unit supplies IP configuration information for all IP devices PCs and IP Phones The DHCP server also supplies specific connection information to the IP Phones BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 72 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP ser
120. as provided neither this License nor any rights acquired by CUSTOMER through this License are assignable Any attempted assignment of rights and or transfer of licensed software not specifically allowed shall be void and conclusively presumed a material breach of this License If NORTEL NETWORKS i claims a material breach of this License and ii provides written notice of such claimed material breach to CUSTOMER and iii observes that such claimed material breach remains uncorrected and or unmitigated more than thirty 30 days following CUSTOMER s receipt of written notice specifying in reasonable detail the nature of the claimed material breach then CUSTOMER acknowledges that this License may be immediately terminated by NORTEL NETWORKS and CUSTOMER further acknowledges that any such termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights and remedies that NORTEL NETWORKS may have at law or in equity EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES FOR ANY ITEM OF LICENSED SOFTWARE IF ANY WILL BE SOLELY THOSE GRANTED DIRECTLY TO CUSTOMER BY DISTRIBUTOR OTHER THAN AS SET FORTH THEREIN THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CONFER ANY WARRANTY TO CUSTOMER FROM OR BY NORTEL NETWORKS THE LICENSED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NORTEL NETWORKS AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND OR NATURE WRITTEN OR ORAL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THIS LIMITATION OF WARRNATIES
121. ation If the units are enabled disable them and then re enable them Check that all the switches on the MBM are on For more information about these switches see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 If the MBM is a GASM or GATM all the switches on the right are not set to on For information about setting these switches see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 To check the MBM switches you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit For instructions see Replacing a media bay module on page 185 To determine why the ATA2 does not function oar Q N Check for a dial tone using an analog device Check that AC power is connected to the ATA2 unit Check that the correct feature for digital sets is included in your installed keycode Verify that the ATA2 is connected to a digital station port Allow sufficient startup time 30 60 sec Plug an analog device into the phone port of the ATA2 and check for a dial tone To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2 1 2 If you hear no dial tone replace a single line telephone for the data communication device If you hear no dial tone at the ATA2 unit a Disconnect the line side of the ATA2 Connect a digital telephone to the ATA2 port b Check that the connection from the ATA2 to the BCM50 hardware works correctly NN40170 305 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 171 To check the ATA2 wiring 1 Use an an
122. ation and Maintenance Guide 216 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart The table LAN port wiring on page 216 lists the wiring details for the LAN ports Table 36 LAN port wiring Pin Signal 1 Receive Data Rx Receive Data Rx Transmit Data Tx No connection No connection Transmit Data Tx No connection OIirN OD a AJOJN No connection NN40170 305 Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart 217 Appendix D WAN ports wiring chart Four BCMS0 main units the BCM50a BCM50ba BCM50e and BCM50be have a Router card On a BCM50a and BCM50ba main units the WAN port is an RJ 11 port On a BCM50e and BCMS50be main units the WAN port is an RJ 45 port The figure BCM50a BCMS50ba BCM50e BCMS50be main unit WAN ports on page 217 shows the WAN ports for the BCM50a BCMS50ba BCMS50e and BCMS0be Figure 90 BCM50a BCM50ba BCM50e BCM50be main unit WAN ports BCM50a BCM50ba WAN port LAN ports Biles RJ 11 pin out BCM50e BCM50be WAN port LAN ports IN Ne Ar be 87654321 0 aa 1 e oT T z RJ 45 pin out The table RJ 11 WAN port wiring on page 217 and the table RJ 45 WAN port wiring on page 218 list the wiring details for the WAN ports Table 37 RJ 11 WAN port wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Pin Signal 1 No connection No connection Ring B
123. ation for all components This reset leaves the software components untouched That is the system has the latest release and patch level of the software installed Only the system and user configuration data is erased and replaced with default values No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 172 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality e Level 2 reset erases all customer and system configuration data and all software releases and patches This reset re installs the original factory configuration settings Level 2 reset also resets the router firmware to what was shipped from the factory No Ethernet connectivity to the system occurs during this operation Warning If you perform a Level 2 reset to solve an undetermined problem and A still have access to Element Manager you must retrieve all the log files for technical support before performing the Level 2 reset A Level 2 reset erases all log files from the system Activate the reset feature You activate the reset feature by pressing the reset switch with a long thin nonmetallic needle in the sequence described in the procedure To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 172 Warning Before performing a Level 1 or Level 2 reset review all the effects of A the levels of reset See Reset levels on page 171 As you press the reset switch the LEDs blink in a predefined fashion to guide and conf
124. bled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language EuroFrench German English Dutch English UK English first is default English English French English French Spanish EuroFrench Spanish Turkish NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 261 Table 62 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Ireland parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong lreland Analog VSC None None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Detailed Simple Simple None Detailed Release code On Off On On Off Off Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF parameters ms Pause time ms 3 5 3 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 3 5 Interdigit time 100 100 80 80 80 100 ms Table 63 Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway and Poland Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Access codes Direct dial digit 9 0 0 0 9 0 Dest code for 0 9 0 9 0 9 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 102 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 4
125. card connected to an ASM8 station interface conforms to these on hook and off hook conditions The ASM8 ASM8 and GASM each has one RJ 21 connector on the faceplate The figure GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors on page 50 shows the GASM Figure 17 GASM faceplate LEDs and connectors GASM RE Power Status The ringer equivalency number REN per port for ASM8 is 1 the REN for ASM8 and GASM is 2 Note The termination of the analog interface can consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed the REN of the interface to which the device is connected NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 51 The table ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications on page 51 shows the specifications for ATA2 ASM8 GASM and GASI Table 5 ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications Sheet 1 of 2 Specification ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM GASI Ringing frequency 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz 20 Hz 1 Hz North America Ringing frequency 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz 25 Hz 1 Hz Europe Ringing voltage North America 80 V rms 10 55 Vrms 10 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 65 V rms 10 Ringing voltage Europe Loop current 75 V rms 10 20 mA minimum N A 20 mA minimum 65 V rms 10
126. cations network and AC mains are possible with this equipment To minimize risk to service personnel and users you must connect the BCM50 system to an outlet with a third wire ground In addition all unused slots must have blank faceplates installed The covers on all units must be in place after servicing Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector You can connect 4 analog lines 4 analog extensions and 12 digital extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector If you use the WFC to connect the lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector see Installing the wiring field card optional on page 92 and the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional on page 119 Warning If you use the same phone line for both an analog trunk and a DSL line L i you must install a DSL filter on the analog trunk to avoid interference with the DSL modem To connect the lines and extensions 1 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 111 Obtain a 25 pair cable with an RJ 21 connector on one end Remove the appropriate side breakout from the cable management door e If this is the first unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units remove the side breakout from the right side of the cable management door e If this is the center unit on a BCM50 system with more than two units remove the side breakout from both sides of the cable management door Plug the RJ 21 connector into the RJ 21 telepho
127. ce the icon is lit on the phone If you try to seize the line using the phone the display shows in use Also if a power failure occurs an analog set on line 1 activates powered by the CO NN40170 305 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 239 Appendix L DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts Digital telephones such as the Business Series Telephones connect to the Digital Station Module DSM 16 or DSM32 through the RJ 21 connectors on the front of the media bay module The DSM16 has a single RJ 21 connector and the DSM32 has two RJ 21 connectors See the figure DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connectors on page 239 Figure 98 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connectors DSM16 DSM32 DSMI6 OSM32 Te e Ile olli elll i n Ie Power Status RJ 21 connector RJ 21 connectors 1 25 26 50 RJ 21 pin out The table DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring on page 239 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connectors on the DSM16 and DSM32 Table 52 DSM16 and DSM32 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 3 Default DN on Expansion Default DN on Expansion port 1 port 2 D 8 a E 2 2 5 ona t N t o an N t OS s 93 5 3 3 5 92 H L a ow oe ao ou as 2 A 2 Set Pin Connection Wire color 9 5 9 5 26 Tip White Blue 1 237 501 253 601 269 701 285 801 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 m 238 502 254 602 270 702 286 802 2 Ring Orange White 28 Tip White Green 3 239 5
128. ck external paging 58 repair authorization 25 replacing components 175 expansion unit 189 hard disk 199 MBM 185 power supply 177 router card 201 reset factory settings 171 levelland2 171 RF interference 25 RJ11 jacks 48 router WAN port wiring chart 217 router card replacing 201 S safety extra low voltage SELV external equipment 42 58 scope status LAN DHCP scope 145 specifications system standards 26 startup profile 151 basic parameters 151 station auxiliary power supply see SAPS station media bay module 4x16 combination module 48 49 ASM 8 and ASM 8 modules 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 48 support 35 express routing code 35 how to gethelp 34 Nortel reseller 35 Nortel Solutions Center 34 Nortel Web site 34 Switches setting MBM 98 symbols 31 system defaults by region 255 T T1 DTM module 45 network interface card 59 telephones ATA2 121 emergency 122 telephony connector default DNs 209 default line numbers 209 Telset Admin basic parameters 133 termination analog port 127 testing expansion unit 168 main unit 167 MBM 169 trademarks 2 trunk modules DTM 45 W WAN media services card 59 WAN cabling 161 WAN port wiring chart 217 WINS server NN40170 305 Index 295 LAN DHCP scope 145 wire color 209 227 228 232 235 237 239 243 wiring chart 4x16 231 235 ADID4 225 ADID8 225 ASM 243 BRIM 223 DSMI6 239 DSM32 239 DTM 221 expansion po
129. ct the cables Retum the BCNH0 system to operation BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 182 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit For information about replacing the BCM50 main unit Preparing the system for maintenance on page 182 Removing the main unit on page 182 Installing the new main unit on page 183 Preparing the system for maintenance In most cases if the BCM50 main unit is faulty the system is already shut down If this is the case continue with the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182 If the system is still operating perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 176 To disconnect the cables 1 Remove the 25 pair cable from the RJ 21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit Remove the Ethernet cable from the LAN port If the main unit is a BCM50a or a BCMS0e remove the Ethernet cable or ADSL line from the WAN port and the Ethernet cables from the Router card LAN ports Remove the expansion cables or LAN cables from the expansion ports on the main unit For the expansion cables make sure you mark the cables with the number of the port to which they connect If the system uses the external Music Source port remove the cable from the Music Source port If the system uses a UPS remove the USB cable from the USB port Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord Remove the power supply cord from the main unit N Warning Leakage cur
130. ction water ingress or too long a loop Transmit alarm On The DTM cannot transmit The DTM sends an alarm indication signal AIS to the terminating switch This half duplex link does not work Transmit error On The DTM is sending a remote alarm indication RAI carrier failure alarm CFA to the terminating switch If the transmit alarm is not on this error indicates a far end or cable problem All LEDS Flashing The DTM is initializing BRIM LEDs The BRIM has one additional LED beside each RJ 48C jack These LEDs are on when the ISDN line is active The figure BRIM LEDs on page 69 shows the location of the LEDs on a BRIM Figure 32 BRIM LEDs Power LED Status LED ISDN BRI S T Interface Loop 1 Loop 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Power Status For more information on the power and status LED functions see Media bay module LEDs expansion units only on page 67 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 70 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs NN40170 305 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 71 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address Each main unit has a dynamic host configuration protocol DHCP server This DHCP server supplies Nortel IP Phones and client computers with IP addresses and connection information If the main unit has no integrated router then you can configure the DHCP server using Element Manager If the main unit h
131. d insert MUX DECT Digital enhanced cordless telecommunications DHCP Dynamic host configuration protocol DIMM Dual in line memory module DMC Digital mobility controller DSM Digital station module digital station media bay module DSP Digital signal processor DSU Data service unit DTE Data terminal equipment DTM Digital trunk module digital trunk media bay module FEM Fiber expansion module FRU Field replaceable unit GASM Global analog station module global analog station media bay module GATM Global analog trunk module global analog trunk media bay module KEM Key expansion module KIM Key indicator module KRS Keycode retrieval system Nortel keycode retrieval system LAN Local area network LIU Line isolation unit MBM Media bay module MSC Media services card MWI Message waiting indication NIC Network interface card ONS on premise station NN40170 305 Chapter 1 Getting started 31 Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 3 of 3 Acronym Description OSI Open switch interval PCI Peripheral component interface PEC Processor expansion card PSTN Public switched telephone network PSU Power supply unit QoS Quality of service RAI Remote alarm indication RAID Redundant array of independent disks REN Ringer equivalence number RFO Redundant feature option RMS Root mean square RPS Redundant power supply SAPS Station auxiliary power supply SELV Safety
132. difference is that the BCM50ba main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector For detailed configuration information see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide See the figure BCM50ba main unit ports and connectors on page 40 BCM50be main unit with Ethernet router The BCM50be main unit provides similar functionality to the BCM50e main unit The difference is that the BCM50be main unit has two integrated BRI ports replacing the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector For detailed configuration information see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide See the figure BCM50be main unit ports and connectors on page 40 For descriptions of the main unit ports and connectors see the table Main unit ports connectors and descriptions on page 41 A main unit contains the following field replaceable units e 1 programmed hard disk e 1 cooling fan e 1 router card BCM50a and BCM50e only NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 39 Figure 1 BCM50 main unit ports and connectors OAM LAN Expansion LAN port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 Music USB sou Power Reset switch RJ 21 telephony connector Figure 2 BCM50a main unit ports and connectors WAN Additional LAN Retention clip mounting hole Power Expansion LAN Reset Music USB Ru 21 telephony
133. dio jack input Sleeve Tip Music signal SE Hm rt on li Ring No connection Sleeve Ground 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold and then adjust the volume at the music source Tip You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone 3 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou add more auxiliary equipment see Connecting an external paging system on page 116 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116 e When you finish adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 120 To connect the music source using the RJ 21 telephony connector Note If you use the RJ 21 telephony connector to connect the music source do not connect a music source to the music source jack on the front of the main unit 1 Connect the music source output to the music source input on the RJ 21 telephony connector To determine which pair of wires to use for the music source input see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 2 Adjust the volume of the music source to an appropriate level by placing a call and putting it on hold and then adjust the volume at the music source NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 119 Tip You can adjust the background music volume at every telephone 3 Select the appropriate option for your system e Ifyou add more auxiliary e
134. disk bracket screws to secure the hard disk to the bracket Caution Use only the screws that you removed from the hard disk in the procedure To remove the hard disk on page 199 Using other screws can damage the hard disk 5 Set the hard disk and bracket in the main unit See the figure Cable routing on page 204 Make sure that the hard disk cable and power cable are routed properly Route the power cable under the bracket and loop the hard disk cable as shown Figure 84 Hard disk and bracket installation 6 Press down lightly on the top of the hard disk to ensure that the hard disk bracket is seated properly BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 204 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 7 Ensure you route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket Also make sure you secure any slack in the fan cable in the clips on the hard disk bracket See the figure Cable routing on page 204 Figure 85 Cable routing Caution Ensure that you follow the same routing for the cables as before you removed the component 8 Fasten the hard disk assembly to the main unit with two screws Use only the supplied screws since other screws can damage the unit 9 Perform a restore or manually reprogram the system 10 Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206 To insert the new fan 1 Attach one end of a grounding st
135. e overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 1 3 16 5 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 17 4 18 4 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown N A Variable Variable Variable N A N A Variable number Public OLI length Local 8 Variable Variable Variable 7 7 Variable number length National 9 Variable Variable Variable 10 10 Variable number length BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 258 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 61 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Set capabilities Pickup group 1 None None None None None None Allow Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled redirect Call forward Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled Disabled 4 Disabled 4 delay 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number
136. e BCM50 system The figure Overview of installing a expansion unit on page 97 shows the steps required to install the expansion unit Figure 45 Overview of installing a expansion unit Install an expansion unit Install the media bay module in the expansion unit Unpack the expansion unit and media bay module Fre you using rack wall or desk mount Set the media bay module switches Rack Desktop Wall hunt the shelf in hount the wall the rack bracket Install the unit in Install the unit on the shelf or on an the desktop or on existing unit an existing unit Install the unit in the bracket Secure the power Secure the power Secure the power supply supply supply Connect the cables to the BCD BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 98 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit For information about installing an expansion unit Unpacking the expansion unit on page 98 Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 Installing the expansion unit on page 103 Unpacking the expansion unit Open the expansion unit box and remove all the components Check that the box contains the following components one expansion unit one expansion unit power supply one power supply cable one expansion cable shielded Ethernet cable one power supply retention clip four rubber feet Visually inspect the c
137. e Name display e Diversion e Originating line identity OLI e Name display e Number display e Redirection e Terminating Line Identity TLI Number display e Centralized voice mail e Centralized voice e Call Charge Indication CCl e Camp on mail e Call Charge Rate Indication e ISDN Call Connection Limit Call Offer CCRD e Network Call Transfer e Loop avoidance e Break in e Executive Intrusion e Trunk Route Optimization e Three Party TRO e Route Optimization e Trunk Anti Tromboning Table 80 ISDN services by Protocol Protocol Market profile Available ISDN services e NI e Caribbean e North America e Basic Call e Number display e DID e ONN blocking e Name display e ETSIEuro e Australia e Italy e Basic Call e AOC E specific e CALA e Norway e DDI changes for Holland and Italy e Denmark e PRC e sub addressing on S loop e MCID e Germany e Spain p e Global e Sweden e ETSI Call Diversion CLIP partial rerouting e COLP e Holland e Switzerland CLIR e United Kingdom e HKTA2015 e Hong Kong e Taiwan e Basic Call e COLP e DDI e CLIR CLIP Analog and digital trunk types The table Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions on page 288 describes the types of analog and digital trunks BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 288 Appendix N Market profile attributes Some of these trunk types are available only when you select specific market profiles Table 81 Analog and digital trunk types a
138. e expansion unit and set it on a flat clean static free surface If the expansion unit is mounted on top of another unit slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit Lift the expansion unit off of the table or other unit and set it on a flat clean static free surface Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 192 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 192 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit Removing the MBM After you remove the expansion unit use the following procedure to remove the MBM from the expansion unit To remove the MBM 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Grasp the right edge of the MBM ejector lever with your thumb index and middle fingers Pull outward to partially eject the MBM Pull further on the lever to eject the MBM from the expansion unit See the figure Remove an MBM on page 192 Figure 76 Remove an MBM DSMIG e Ile elli e o Power Status Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward 3 Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM Remove the MBM from the expansion unit Place the MBM in a flat clean and static free surface Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static f
139. e following procedures to install a BCM50 unit in a rack To install the rack mount shelf in an equipment rack on page 85 To install the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf on page 86 To install the power supply on the rack mount shelf on page 94 To install the rack mount shelf in an equipment rack A OO N 5 Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the BCM50 unit Position the rack mount shelf in the rack Align the holes in the rack mount shelf with the holes in the equipment rack rails Fasten the rack mount shelf to the rack using the four rack screws supplied with the rack mount kit See the figure Fasten the rack mount shelf to an equipment rack on page 85 Proceed to Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf on page 85 Figure 35 Fasten the rack mount shelf to an equipment rack 7 ol ol ol ol ol ol R fo d QRO 2 222 09 D x x x p 20 Of booooooooooooooo Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf The rack mount shelf has slots molded into its surface to which you attach the BCMS0 units By attaching the BCM50 units to these slots you can prevent someone from accidently knocking them off the rack mount shelf BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 86 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit If you install additional units you can install a second unit on the shelf beside the fir
140. e system for maintenance 0 0 eee eee eee eee 178 Removing the power SUDDIY 44544 eh 178 Connect the new power supply 0000 eee eee 178 Chapter 21 Replacing a malin Un 2 6 ccs ecw Een an aaa nenn 181 Preparing the system for maintenance 00 0 eee ee eee 182 Removing the man UNE 2255 Giese i Tr a ee Wem eh kiari 182 Installing the new man Unit ass ee Ree eG ees 183 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module 20 0c eee ween eee eee 185 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 0 00 c eee eee eee 189 Dis connecting the Bales s potas Canes eee ed otek KB eee oe Rad 190 Removing the expansion unit 0 002 naaa rna anaana eee 190 Removing the MBN rennt 192 Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit 00 c eee eee 192 Installing the new expansion unit 00 0 eee 193 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 0000 e eee eee eee eee 195 SHORTS east 196 Preparing the system for maintenance 00 0c eee eee eee 196 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 16 Contents Rembangtne ial UN ein 196 Opening the man UNE CASS euere Pause ak nah bade ke ees 196 Removing an internal component Heer anne eee 198 Inserting the new component 2 26 ccecceave 10 RR in come 201 BlBeing he MMM east era RE EEE A 206 Maalina Demand er 207 Connecting the Gables 2 40 056208 Here een 207 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring Chart
141. econds Delay ring After 15 After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 After 4 rings After 4 rings Telephony transfer rings rings feature settings Transfer After 15 After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 After 4 rings After 4 rings callback rings rings timeout Network 30 30 30 30 N A 30 30 callback Host delay 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ms Link time N A 600 300 600 600 600 600 ms Target line if Busy Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime busy setting BRI ISDN Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Answer Mode Companding A law A law A law A law mu law mu law A law law DTI carrier E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 E1 System settings type Number of 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 rings in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Mode Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring 4 ring cycles 4 ring 4 ring cycles 4 ring 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 timeout sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 17 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 08 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 00 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End
142. eeecses 29 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 20 cece eee eee eee 37 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 002 c eee eee eee eens 61 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address 71 Installing the BCM50 system 0 2 0c e eee eee 75 Checking the installation prerequisites 00 cece eee eee 79 Installing the main unit casrcccacciceicdaneerseaneaseeaenraensaeenas 83 To install the rack mount shelf in an equipment rack cceceeeeecceeeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeetees 85 To install the BCM50 unit on the rack mount Shelf ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeee 86 To installa BCM50 unit on top of another unit 87 TO ostalih Ba Bee an 87 To install the BCM50 wall mount bracket cccseceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseaeeseeeeeteneeeeeee 88 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket 200srs400nnnnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnen 90 TO NAAN i gsc cassia cee sss march une u cai aa ea au FRA ee 92 To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or Shelf ccececeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee 93 To install the power supply on the rack mount Shelf ceeeeesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees 94 To install the power supply on the desktop cceesecceeeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeeteseeneeeeeeseeeeeeeenaes 95 To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure 95 To install a power supply using the single power supply mount
143. emplate panel appears Read the information on this panel Click Download Startup Profile Template on the right side of the screen and follow the instructions to download the template Configuring basic parameters To customize a Startup Profile for your system Note You cannot copy and paste data between cells in the Startup Profile If you attempt this the data validation within the spreadsheet becomes corrupt If corruption occurs download another copy of the Startup Profile template from the BCMSO main unit 1 On a computer with a USB port and Microsoft Excel open the Startup Profile template Microsoft Excel template If you do not have a copy of the Startup Profile template see the procedure To download the Startup Profile template on page 153 For instructions about using the Startup Profile template see the Usage Instructions tab Click the StartupProfileTemplate tab to begin entering information in the Startup Profile template 4 Enter your BCMSO system ID in the System ID field in the Startup Profile template The system ID is on the box of the main unit and on the main unit itself If you enter the wrong system ID the Startup Profile does not work with your system 5 Click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile sps file and a version of the Startup Profile editor Excel spreadsheet on your computer The file names for the Startup Profile ed
144. ephony devices and power to the BCMSO system The figure Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system on page 105 shows the steps required to connect the cables to the BCM50 system Figure 48 Overview of connecting cables to the BCM50 system Connect the cables to the BCNHO system Do you have any expansion units Connect the expansion units to the main unit Connect the lines and extensions Connect the auxiliary equipment Fre you using quip a UP Connect the LAN cable Connect the UPS Install telephones and enpherals Connect the ajii power supplies BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 106 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system e Connecting the expansion unit on page 106 e Connecting the power supply on page 108 e Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110 e Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115 Connecting the expansion unit The expansion unit connects to the main unit through the expansion ports on the front of the units The figure Expansion ports on page 106 shows the location of the expansion ports on the BCM50 main unit and the expansion unit Figure 49 Expansion ports Main unit Expansion LAN Expansion LAN port 2 port 3 Bonn 0 jee ei o Power Status
145. er Next step After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system you can test the system For information about testing the BCM50 system see Testing basic BCMS0 functionality on page 167 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 166 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN NN40170 305 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 167 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality This section describes how to test the BCM50 system For information about testing and troubleshooting the BCM50 system To test the main unit on page 167 To troubleshoot the main unit on page 168 To test the expansion unit on page 168 To troubleshoot the expansion unit on page 168 To test the MBM on page 169 To test a station MBM on page 169 To test a ttunk MBM on page 169 To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager on page 170 To determine why the ATA2 does not function on page 170 To determine why there is no dial tone at the ATA2 on page 170 To check the ATA2 wiring on page 171 Reset to factory settings on page 171 To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset on page 172 To test the main unit If you have the digital station feature included in your installed keycode use the following test to ensure the main unit is operating properly 1 A U N o NOA Go to an extension that is connected to the RJ 21 telephony connector on the main unit Check for a dial tone Use this extension to m
146. erica Specs Caribbean Yes North Refer to North 600 Q 600 Q mu law America America Specs Global No North American North N A 600 Q 600 Q A law based A law America Hong Kong No North American North N A 600 Q 600 Q mu law based mu law America Ireland No UK Based UK N A 370 Q 300 Q A Law 620 Q 11310 1000 Q II nF 220 nF Mexico No North American North N A 600 Q 600 Q A law based A law America New Zealand No UK based telephony UK N A 3700 300 Q A law with Australian tones 620 011310 1000 Q II nF 220 nF North America Yes North EIA TIA 464A 600 Q 600 Q mu law America CS 03 Part T512 1 T512 2 Poland Yes Poland 1 Polish 600 Q 600 Q A law ASS_1_v1 doc 2 Technical Requirements for Private Automatic Branch Exchanges Reference Analog interfaces11 doc United Yes UK BS 6450 Part 4 370 Q 300 Q A law Kingdom BTNR 1080 620 Q II 1000 Q II EN 41003 AnnexD 310 nF RONE BS 6305 BTNR 315 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 278 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 71 Loop interface and call supervision parameters Loop interface Call supervision Disconn Loop ect Ringing Current Loop Min Min Min max Min Supervi Ringing amplitu Detect current seize answer recall clear sion OSI frequency de Thresho limit duration duration duration
147. eries b series main units Figure 19 Patch panel connectors 0 06 07 08 J Wall mount bracket To wall mount a BCM50 unit main unit or expansion unit you need a wall mount bracket The wall mount bracket is attached to the wall and the unit is connected to the wall mount bracket If the BCM50 system includes additional units you need a wall mount bracket for each unit Each wall mount bracket includes a cable management tray that you use to store and organize the cables connected to the BCM50 units See the figure Wall mount bracket on page 53 Figure 20 Wall mount bracket BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 54 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure There are two BCMS50 power supply mounting options that enable you to install your power supply units next to your BCM50 system and keep the power cables neatly organized e Power supply mounting enclosure accommodates up to three power supplies in a case that is similar in size and shape to a BCM50 unit You can install the power supply mounting enclosure in the same way as BCM50 unit in a rack on a wall or on a desktop e Single power supply mounting bracket accommodates a single power supply for wall mount applications Wiring field card The wiring field card WFC simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit The WEC instal
148. et Key Mapping Language Tone Gate Length Display Length Norway 8 YES Norwegian NO 7 16 11 Pakistan i YES United NO 7 16 12 Kingdom English Panama 8 YES Spanish NO 7 16 7 Peru 8 YES Spanish NO 7 16 9 Philippines YES Spanish NO 7 16 11 Portugal 8 YES Portuguese NO 7 16 9 Poland i YES Polish NO 7 16 11 POC ns NO Mandarin NO 11 9 10 Qatar r YES Arabic NO 6 16 6 Romania 8 YES German NO 7 16 8 Russia YES Russian NO 7 16 12 Saudi YES Arabic NO 7 16 8 Arabia Singapore YES United NO 8 16 8 Kingdom English South Africa YES United NO 7 16 12 Kingdom English South Korea YES Korean NO 16 10 Spain 8 YES Euro NO 7 11 Spanish Sweden 8 YES Swedish NO 8 11 Switzerland 8 YES German NO 7 7 11 Taiwan ay NO Mandarin NO 7 12 Thailand 8 YES Thai NO 7 16 10 UK 8 YES United YES 11 9 11 Kingdom English United Arab YES Arabic NO 6 16 8 Emirate Uruguay 8 YES Spanish NO 6 16 10 Venezuela 8 YES Spanish NO 7 16 9 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 287 ISDN line services The table ISDN line services on page 287 shows the ISDN private network services that are supported by BCMS0 The table ISDN services by Protocol on page 287 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 79 ISDN line services MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG e Basic Call e Basic Call e Basic Call e Basic Call e DDI e DDI e DDI e DDI
149. etails Provision Lines Trunk type PRI E1 Parameters Protocol Euro Overlap receiving r RA 7 Clock source Secondary external x 4 Inthe Modules section select the expansion unit to configure NN40170 305 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation optional 159 You must include the expansion port feature in your purchased keycode If you activate one expansion port only the expansion port on the left expansion LAN port 2 is active Therefore Expansion 1 must be connected to the active port expansion LAN port 2 For location of the LAN ports see the figure Expansion ports on page 106 and the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 107 Double click the Module type field to display the list Select the type of MBM that you installed in the expansion unit Click Enable oO N a If you installed a second expansion unit repeat steps 4 to 7 to enable the second MBM You can set other parameters for the MBMs depending on the type of MBM you installed Configuring modem settings Your system modem is either enabled or disabled depending on the configuration you chose during your basic configuration If you use the modem for management tasks you can customize settings including dial in and dial out settings depending on your specific needs For information about configuring the modem see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Configuration System Checking for sof
150. extra low voltage SSD System status display UPS Uninterruptable power supply USB Universal serial bus VMWI Visual message waiting indicator VoIP Voice over Internet protocol WAN Wide area network Symbols and text conventions These symbols highlight critical information for the BCM50 3 0 system e Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work l f improperly BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 32 Chapter 1 Getting started B Note Alerts you to important information B Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task cD for the system Security Note Indicates a point of system security where you can change a default or where the administrator must decide on the level of security required q Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap before performing the maintenance procedure procedure Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM50 main unit and expansion unit power cords from the AC outlet before performing any maintenance These conventions and symbols represent the Business Series Terminal display and Convention Example Used for Word in a special font shown in the top line of the display Underlined wo
151. f 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 38 Tip Black Green 7 075 105 13 Ring Green Black 39 Tip Black Brown 8 076 106 14 Ring Brown Black 40 Noconnection Black Slate 15 No connection Slate Black 49 No connection Violet Brown 24 No connection Brown Violet Aux 50 Tip Violet Slate Ns 25 Ring Slate Violet T Note The AUX port supports full data speeds When the line is in use by an analog device the icon is lit on the phone to indicate it is in use If you try to seize the line using the phone the display shows in use Also if a power failure occurs an analog set on line 1 activates powered by the CO BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 230 Appendix GATM wiring chart NN40170 305 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts 231 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts You can connect up to 4 analog telephone lines and up to 16 digital telephones to the 4x16 media bay module MBM The analog telephones lines connect to the 4x16 through the RJ 11 jacks labeled 1 to 4 on the front of the MBM Do not connect analog telephone lines to the auxiliary jack on the front of the media bay module These jacks are intended for analog telephones designated as emergency telephones See the figure 4x16 connectors on page 231 The digital telephones such as the Business Series Telephones connect to the RJ 21 connec
152. file attributes 249 Table 56 Localized Dial and Quiet Dial Sheet 2 of 2 Dial Quiet Dial Level per Level per Tone Tones Tone Market profile Localized Tones Hz dBmO0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence United Kingdom Yes 440 350 17 5 Continuous 440 350 14 5 Continuous Table 57 Special Dial Overflow and Busy Sheet 1 of 2 Special Dial Overflow Busy Level Level Level per per per Tones Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 400 13 100 ms on 800 13 100 ms on 425 13 375 ms on 900 ms off 100 ms off 375 ms off Bahrain 330 400 16 100 ms on 425 16 400 ms on 425 15 375 ms on 900 ms off 350 ms off 375 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off Brazil 425 11 5 500 ms on 950 1400 18 333 ms 425 11 5 250 ms on 500 ms off 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off CALA Silence 480 620 21 250 mson 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Canada Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Caribbean Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Denmark Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 250 ms on 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off France Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 440 11 5 500 ms on 1800 11 5 333 ms 500 ms off silence 25 333 ms silence 1s off German
153. gt General tab e Minimum security e SNMP version support SNMP community N A Configuration gt SNMP Community e Community string Administrator Access gt st SNMP gt Community Ype Ol a ceSs Strings tab SNMP manager N A Configuration gt SNMP Manager e Manager IP address Administrator Access gt SNMP gt General tab BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 132 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system Table 21 Startup parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile User account e User ID e Group e Description e Callback number N A Configuration gt Administrator Access gt View by Accounts tab User Account SRG Main Office e VoIP Trunk Access Code e Test Local Mode Timeout e Primary Network Connect Server Address e Alternate Network Connect Server Address e Network Connect Server Port e Heartbeat Protocol Port e H 323 ID e Numbering Plan ID e Type of Number e Node ID e MO Access Code Length N A Configuration gt Resources gt Survivable Remote Gateway gt S1000 Main Office Settings tab SRG Main Office NN40170 305 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters 133 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters You can use Telset Administration through a digital telephone with a two line display to set the BCMS0 c
154. gure the SNMP manager Motoriese anea 147 Tocroate user acous en een 148 To TINS SANG en 149 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 151 To download the Startup Profile template 2444444400442400nnnnnanannnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnn 153 To customize a Startup Profile for your system 22uu22240unnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnn 153 To load the Startup Profile data onto the BCM50 system 220nssnesnnnnennnennennnnn 154 Completing the initial installation optional 2 00055 157 To Grail the MBMR ana ae 158 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 161 To connect the BCM50 system to the LAN ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteneeeesaeeess 163 To connect the BCM50e or BCM50be main units to the WAN uun nennen 164 To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN un nennen 164 NN40170 305 Task List 9 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 0 cee e eee eee eee 167 TG DASE Cie MANN eared dan Aone al een ea GS 167 To roubloshooi This HAN UNE 168 VPE RB INIT een 168 To troubleshoot ie expansion UN ee 168 Retest tile MEN A ek 169 We LPS Salon MEN nee 169 Fo seta 10 MEN ee een iene 169 To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager 170 To determine why the ATA2 does not function 42440u4444nnnH0nnenn nano onen nnnnonnen nn 170 To determine why there is no dia
155. h as a radio with a high impedance earphone jack For information about connecting an external music source e Music source specifications on page 117 e To connect the music source using the music source jack on page 118 e To connect the music source using the RJ 21 telephony connector on page 118 Music source specifications Ensure that the music source follows these guidelines e Nominal input impedance is 3 3 kilohms e Nominal sensitivity of this interface returned to digital encoded PCM is 22 dBm0 for a 0 25 V rms input signal e The input is limited so that the encoded analog content at the digital interface to the network does not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any three second interval e The maximum non clipped input level is 1 V rms e The interface is protected against ringing cross BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 118 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system The music source jack is on the front of the main unit If you use the music source jack to connect the music source do not connect a music source to the music source pair on the RJ 21 telephony connector To connect the music source using the music source jack 1 Connect the miniature jack of the music source output 3 5 mm mono audio jack to the music source input on the BCM50 main unit See the figure Music source jack on page 118 Figure 52 Music source jack Music jack u BCMS0 Music source 3 5 mm mono au
156. he figure Wall mount lock in unlock position on page 90 Figure 39 Wall mount lock in unlock position 3 Align the feet on the BCMSO unit with the four holes in the wall mount bracket See the figure Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall mount bracket on page 91 NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 91 Figure 40 Attach the BCM50 unit to the wall mount bracket 4 Press the unit against the wall mount bracket and slide the unit down until it clicks in place 5 Slide the wall mount lock to the left lock position See the figure Wall mount lock in lock position on page 91 Figure 41 Wall mount lock in lock position Use the supplied screw to secure the wall mount lock in position Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each additional BCMSO unit you install Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation For details about installation options see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 92 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit Installing the wiring field card optional Install the optional wiring field card WFC in the cable management tray of the main unit To install the WFC Clear the WFC installation area of all cables Place the WFC in the installation area with the 50 pin header at the top Slide the WFC down until it is at the bottom of the installation area and held in place by the three clip
157. hem A Warning Leakage currents You must connect the power cord to a grounded outlet before connecting the telephony and data networking cables to the system Use Element Manager to enable the MBM For more information about enabling an MBM see the Administration Guide BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 194 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 195 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component You can replace three components inside the main unit the hard disk the fan and the router card The figure Overview of replacing an internal component on page 195 shows an overview of replacing an internal component handling electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Caution You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when Figure 77 Overview of replacing an internal component Replace an intemal component Prepare the BChHO system for maintenance Install the new intemal component Disconnect the cables Close the main unit case Install the main unit Connect the cables Remove the main unit Open the main unit case Remove the intemal component Retum the BChHO system to operation BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 196 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component For information about replacing an internal component e Pre
158. his figure are approximate BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 174 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality Table 31 Level 1 reset Step User action Power LED Status LED System state Alternative user action Solid yellow Solid yellow Power self test No action system 1 Boot the system Solid yellow Off Power self test nah Flashing yellow Solid yellow Ready for reset input Do not press reset Press reset switch Solid red Flashing yellow Request Level 1 reset switch system boots 2 normally ie Press reset switch Wait five seconds Flashing red Flashing yellow AWaiting beveli reset system proceeds to 3 confirmation EO N System performs Level 1 reset Solid red Solid yellow All configuration Do not press reset 4 Press reset switch programming erased switch system boots System rebooted and normally Solid green Solid green is ready for user action Table 32 Level 2 reset Step User action Power LED Status LED System state Alternative user action Solid yellow Solid yellow Power self test No action system 1 Boot up the system Solid yellow Off Power self test nad Flashing yellow Solid yellow Ready for reset input Do not press reset Press reset switch Solid red Flashing yellow Request Level 1 reset switch system boots 2 normally A He nn Do not press reset g f Solid red Flashing red Request Level 2 reset switch system remai
159. hone Automatic Switching Network GB3380 82 doc 34 66 700 NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 273 Table 66 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 3 of 3 Differences PSTN Standards Specifications between GATI Referenced Pulse Dialing ms G4x16 G8x16 New GATM4 8 and Break Make _ Interdigit Market profile Localized Legacy GATM4 8 time time time Russia Yes Legacy GATM4 8 not 1 OGSTFS Russian PSTN specs 60 67 60 supported 2 si3050 pdf 3 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs pdf South Africa Yes Legacy GATM4 8 not 1 S_Africa_Specs pdf 40 33 40 supported 2 ICASA TE 010 doc 3 si3050 pdf 4 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs pdf Spain Yes Legacy GATM4 8 not 1 M1_Analogue_Trunk_Card_Spain p 600 950 200 supported f 2 Public Switched Telephone Network Analogue Line interface specification Interfaz_de_telefonica_de_Espa_a v5 _Eng doc 3 si3050 pdf 4 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs pdf Taiwan Yes None 1 Technical Specifications for 66 33 800 Terminal Equipment for Connection to Public Switched Telephone Network PSTNO1 September 27 2001 United Kingdom Yes None 1 BT Public Switched Telephone 66 34 740 Network PSTN SIN352 2 BT Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN SIN227 AC7 3 BT Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN SIN242
160. ify the following IP settings IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway b If DHCP is currently disabled e Press ENL to enable DHCP The system must reboot to enable DHCP e Press IP to modify the IP settings You can modify the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway However these settings have no effect if the system is disabled 7 Press Back to reboot the system To configure the modem Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone 2 Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 738662 and 266344 respectively Press NEXT to scroll through the menu and select Modem Press OK The display screen shows whether the modem is enabled or disabled Perform one of the following tasks a Ifthe modem is disabled press ENL to enable the modem b Ifthe modem is enabled press DIS to disable the modem For more information about modem configuration see the Networking Configuration Guide BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 136 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters To select the region Set the Region using Feature PROFILE from a two line display telephone For information about using Telset Administration to set this parameter see the Telset Administration Guide To select the telephony startup template and start DN Set the Template and Start DN using Feature STARTUP from a
161. in the expansion unit Both LEDs must be solid green If either LED is not solid green a problem exists with the MBM or the expansion unit For a detailed description of the LED states see Media bay module LEDs expansion units only on page 67 If this system has a second expansion unit check the Power and Status LEDs on the second MBM Use Element Manager to restore the programming For information about restoring system programming see the Administration Guide Set the basic configuration parameters For more information see Configuring the BCM50 system on page 129 N Warning When you restart the system all digital telephony IP client voice mail and VoIP ports are not available until the system services restart NN40170 305 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply 177 Chapter 20 Replacing a power supply This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a power supply The figure Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply on page 177 shows an overview of replacing a power supply Figure 71 Overview of replacing the BCM50 power supply Replace the power supply Prepare the BCNHO system for maintenance Remove the power supply Connect the new power supply Retum the BChH0 system to operation For information about replacing a power supply e Preparing the system for maintenance on page 178 e Removing the power supply on page 178 e Connect the new power supply on page 178 BCM5
162. ing 42 58 external line isolation units LIU MSC jacks 42 58 external paging amplifier 58 F FCC registration 25 RF interference 25 G G4x16 connecting lines 114 setting dip switches 100 wiring chart 235 G4x16 G8x16 49 G8x16 connecting lines 114 setting dip switches 100 wiring chart 235 GASM dip switches 100 GATM default line numbers 235 dip switches 101 GATM4 connecting lines 114 default line numbers 227 wiring chart 227 GATM8 connecting lines 114 default line numbers 228 wiring chart 227 H handset standards and specifications 26 hard disk replacing 199 hardware overview 37 how to get help support 34 Industry Canada registration 25 initial installation 157 insertion loss 127 NN40170 305 Index 293 insertion loss measurement 126 install ATA2 121 emergency telephone 122 on table or shelf 93 installing telephones and peripherals 121 ISDN line services by region 287 J jack external paging 58 page relay 58 L LAN cabling 161 LAN port wiring chart 215 lease time LAN DHCP scope 145 LED ADSL router 64 BRI onboard BCM50b BCM50ba BCM50be 67 BRIM 69 DTM 68 ethernet router 65 expansion unit 67 LAN ports 63 MBM 67 overview 61 system status 61 licence music on hold 24 Line numbers default on BRI onboard 214 defaulton BRIM 224 line numbers default on 4x16 232 default on ADID4 225 defaulton DTM 221 defaulton GATM 235 default on GAT
163. ing BCM50 hardware items simplify the setup and connection of the system e Rack mount shelf on page 52 e Wall mount bracket on page 53 e Power supply mounting bracket and enclosure on page 54 e Patch panel on page 53 e Wiring field card on page 54 Rack mount shelf To rack mount a BCM50 unit main unit or expansion unit you need a rack mount shelf The rack mount shelf mounts in a standard 19 inch equipment rack The BCM50 unit then clips into the tabs on the rack mount shelf These tabs prevent the unit from sliding or falling off the shelf If the BCM50 system includes additional units you can clip another unit to a second set of tabs on the rack mount shelf You can clip additional units to tabs on the top of the other units See the figure Rack mount shelf installed in equipment rack on page 52 Figure 18 Rack mount shelf installed in equipment rack NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 53 Patch panel The BCMS0 patch panel simplifies the connections of lines and extensions to the main unit The BCM5S0 patch panel installs into the rack mount shelf in a standard equipment rack and connects to the RJ 21 telephony connector with a user supplied RJ 21 cable See the figure Patch panel connectors on page 53 Note The four analog lines on the patch panel are only available with the standard main units The four analog lines are not available with the BRI s
164. ing bracket 95 Installing an expansion unit 0 00 c eee eee eee 97 Toset 54218 or G8x16 dip SWHCNSS anne 100 Te Set GASNI SP SWESS ratier aa a een 100 BT dB ee 101 We neta An MEN Kanaren 102 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 00e eee eees 105 To connect an RII UNE ee eine 107 Te Gannett a power Supply usinga UP S aa nnna 109 To connect a power supply without a UPS c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeteaeeees 109 To connect the lines and dessen dianani aneii 112 To connect telephone lines to DTM BRIM or 4x16 MBMs nnnnn 113 To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4 GATM8 or G4x16 G8x16 114 To connect extensions to DSM16 DSM32 ASM8 4x16 G4x16 or G8x16 MBMs 115 To install ar ALIN ringen ae 116 To install an external paging System nenne 116 To connect the music source using the music source jack seeseerrsererreern 118 To connect the music source using the RJ 21 telephony connector eec 118 To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional uurrs20sss nennen 119 To connect the cables to the patch panel optional 40rn440enn nennen 119 Installation and Maintenance Guide 8 Task List Installing telephones and peripherals 0 cee eee eens 121 To install the emergency telephone iiai sss He 122 Installing the analog terminal adapter 0 0c e eee eee 123 Wi G
165. ingdom 90 100 1600 15 200 Table 69 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 1 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone Australia Bellcore Not No No ROI and Supported Not Not supported ROA supported supported Bahrain ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 10 Hz supported supported 380 10 on 380 10 off Brazil Not Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not supported A C 425 25 Hz supported supported NOTE Not 250 ms On Supported on 250 ms Off GATI or 10 Legacy GATM4 8 CALA Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Canada Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Caribbean Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Global Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Hong Kong Bellcore Not No Supported Yes NOT Supported Not Not supported 480 10Hz _ supported supported supported and 620 10 on Legacy Hz 500 100 GATM4 8 ms On 500 80 ms Off Ireland ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 Hz supported supported 25 450 ms On 450 ms Off 23 Mexico ETSI Not No Supported No Supported
166. installing telephone equipment e Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm e Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations e Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature accompanying the product Use When using your telephone equipment basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons including the following 1 2 3 Read and understand all instructions Follow the instructions marked on the product Unplug this product or host equipment from the wall outlet before cleaning Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners Use a damp cloth for cleaning Do not use this product near water for example near a bath tub wash bowl kitchen sink or laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool Do not place this product on an unstable cart stand or table The product may fall causing serious damage to the product This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register This product should not be placed in a built in installation unless proper ven
167. ion The power supply must be within 1 5 m 5 feet of the BCM50 unit and within 1 5 m 5 feet of the AC power outlet wall outlet or UPS Note Do not stack more than one BCMS0 unit or power supply mounting enclosure on top of a first unit e For a rackmount installation you can install the power supply directly onto the rackmount shelf or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure e For a wallmount installation you can use the power supply mounting enclosure for up to three power supplies or a single power supply mounting bracket for a single power supply e For a desktop installation you can mount them directly to the desk or you can use the power supply mounting enclosure for up to three power supplies To install the power supply on the rack mount shelf 1 Place the power supply behind the BCM50 units on the back of the rack mount shelf Make sure the power supply is on its side with the label facing the back of the shelf Use two cable ties to secure the power supply to the rack mount shelf Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each power supply you mount NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 95 To install the power supply on the desktop 1 Place the power supply next to the BCM50 unit on the desktop The power supply must be within 1 5 m 5 feet of the BCMSO unit and within 1 5 m 5 feet of the AC power outlet wall outlet or UPS To install a power supply using the power supply mounting enclosure
168. irm user input The various states of the power and status LEDs indicate the following e A blinking power LED indicates a user input window the BCM50 system is waiting for user input e A solid red power LED indicates extreme action is requested caution is urged e A solid status LED any color indicates level of reset action Level 1 is yellow Level 2 is red e A blinking status LED indicates an interim state trying to establish user request e A solid status LED indicates confirmation of a user selection power LED has priority To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset The router configuration of a BCM50a or BCMS0e is not affected by a Level 1 reset To perform a soft reset on the router use Element Manager See the figure Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence on page 173 or follow the sequence in the table Level 1 reset on page 174 and the table Level 2 reset on page 174 to perform a Level 1 and Level 2 reset NN40170 305 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 173 Figure 69 Level 1 and Level 2 reset sequence Reset query state Level 2 reset pending Perform level 2 reset ep EB gt o y 2 8 amp Q 5 a o be 05 3 a 2 3 2 g Jaw puoras Q System is ready SOJNUIW 7 HRM System reboots p Reset request cancelled Note 1 In the reset confirm S i stem is read steps the lower LED flashes 2 2 faster than the upper LED Note 2 All times in t
169. ist the wiring details for the RJ 45 ports Table 34 BRI port wiring Pin Signal Signal on system side 1 No connection No connection 2 No connection No connection 3 Receive Rx Tx 4 Transmit Tx Rx 5 Transmit Tx Rx 6 Receive Rx TX 7 No connection No connection 8 No connection No connection BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 214 Appendix B BRI wiring chart Table 35 BRI line numbering Port number Default line numbers on Expansion port 1 Default line numbers on Expansion port 2 1 065 066 095 096 2 067 068 097 098 3 069 070 099 100 4 071 072 101 102 NN40170 305 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart 215 Appendix C LAN ports wiring chart All BCM50 units have LAN ports as follows e The BCM50 and BCM50b have three LAN ports e The BCM50a and BCM50ba have seven LAN ports e The BCMS0e and BCMSObe have seven LAN ports e The expansion unit has one LAN port The figure LAN ports on the BCMS50 units on page 215 shows the LAN ports on the BCMS0 units Figure 89 LAN ports on the BCM50 units BCM50 BCM50b Expansion unit 87654321 LAN port pin out BCM50 Install
170. itor and the Startup Profile consist of the system ID followed by the appropriate extension BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 154 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters gt Note Never edit the Startup Profile sps file directly always use the Startup Profile editor to make changes 10 11 12 Enter the remaining information into the Startup Profile editor that you want loaded onto the BCM50 main unit The Startup Profile editor contains explanations of the various parameters Click the cell where you want to enter information and the Help text appears You can specify which parameters to load onto your system by selecting Apply If you do not want to load certain parameters select Ignore After you enter all the information click the large button at the top of the Startup Profile template to save a version of the Startup Profile sps file and a version of the Startup Profile editor Excel spreadsheet on your computer Exit from Microsoft Excel Insert the USB storage device into the USB port of the computer Copy the Startup Profile sps file to the root directory of the USB storage device To load your keycodes using the Startup Profile copy the keycode file to the root directory of the USB storage device The name of the keycode file on the USB storage device must exactly match the file name you entered in the Startup Profile editor Remove the USB storage device from
171. ives a prompt to enter the assigned DN during the programming session Advertisement Logo Any information in this field appears on the display of all IP telephones For example your company name or slogan 24 characters in length Tip To automatically configure IP Phones with DNs assigned 1 Select the Enable registration check box 2 Select the Enable global registration password check box 3 Leave the Global password field blank 4 Select the Auto assign DNs check box After the IP Phones are operational clear the Enable registration check box You can configure other attributes on the IP Terminal Global Settings tab depending on the requirements for your system To configure SNMP settings A OO N From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it From the Administrator Access folder select SNMP Select the General tab It is normally selected by default From the SNMP Settings area click Modify The Modify SNMP Settings dialog box appears NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 147 5 Configure the attributes for Modify SNMP Settings See the table Modify SNMP Settings attributes on page 147 Table 27 Modify SNMP Settings attributes Attribute Description Enable SNMP Agent Choose whether to enable or disable the SNMP agent by selecting or not selecting the check box Minimum required security Se
172. iwan 440 14 Continuous Silence Silence United Kingdom 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Table 60 Reorder 1 kHz Sheet 1 of 3 Reorder 1 kHz Level Level Tones per Tone Tones per Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 425 13 off 375 ms on N A 23 off 375 ms off Bahrain 400 16 75 ms on N A 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off Brazil 425 11 5 250 ms on N A 250 ms off BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 254 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 60 Reorder 1 kHz Sheet 2 of 3 Reorder 1 kHz Level Level Tones per Tone Tones per Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence CALA 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off Canada 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off Caribbean 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off Denmark Silence N A France Silence N A Germany 425 11 5 240 ms on N A 240 ms off Global 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off Holland 425 11 5 250 ms on N A 250 ms off Hong Kong 480 620 14 5 250 ms on N A 250 ms off Ireland 200 11 5 400 ms on N A Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off Italy 425 8 200 mson N A 200 ms off Mexico 480 620 21 250 ms on 1004 14 Continuous 250 ms off New Zealand 400
173. kets are properly aligned If these options do not meet your requirements other options are available For example you can route the Amphenol connector cable to the left of the unit or you can route the cable straight down the wall 5 Attach the wall mount bracket with five 8 x 2 cm 8 x 0 75 in round head wood screws a Install one screw in the backboard Do not tighten the screw head against the backboard Leave approximately 0 5 cm 0 25 in of the screw exposed from the backboard Hang the wall mount bracket on the mounting screw Use a level to make sure the wall mount bracket is level Install two screws into the screw holes in the wall mount bracket See the figure Wall mount bracket on page 89 Tighten the wood screws against the wall mount bracket Open the cable management door BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 90 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit g Install two screws into the screw holes in the cable trough 6 Ifthe BCM50 system has only one unit go to the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket on page 90 If the BCM50 system has more than one unit repeat steps 3 to 6 for each wall mount bracket 7 Go to the procedure To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket on page 90 To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket 1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit 2 Slide the wall mount lock fully to the right unlock position See t
174. ks in place Remove the terminal block from the patch panel a Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block b Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 120 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block Insert the bare wire ends 6 mm or 0 25 in in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place Reinstall the terminal block on the patch panel Connect the wires digital telephones analog telephones and analog trunks to the patch panel 9 Connect cables to the main unit as required Next step After you connect the cables to the BCM50 system you can configure the initial parameters For information about configuring these parameters see Installing telephones and peripherals on page 121 NN40170 305 121 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals This section describes how to install telephones and peripherals You can add telephones and peripherals before or after you initialize your system Which station media bay module MBM you use determines your telephone configuration When you initialize the BCMSDO it creates default settings
175. l CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Access codes Direct dial 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 digit Dest code for O 9 0 9 9 0 9 default route Digital ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN trunking DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 protocols DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 Protocols protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 DMS100 ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 DMS250 MCDN 4ESS 4ESS MCDN MCDN Global GATv1 GATv2 GATv1 GATv1 GATv1 GATv1 N A analog trunk GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 versions BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 256 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 61 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Conference Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No tone supported Held line After 30 Off Off Off Off Off Off reminder s
176. l are permitted to service this equipment Ensure the BCM system is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening The MBMs have been safety approved for installation into the BCM system It is the responsibility of the installer and user to ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals or local electrical code regulations for telecommunications equipment and wiring installation Do not connect the digital station ports of the DSM16 DSM32 or Combination MBMs to the PSTN Only approved digital phone sets or peripheral devices can connect to the DSM16 DSM32 and Combination MBMs Warning Digital Station ports DSM16 DSM32 and Analog Station ports GASM8 must not be connected to exposed plant This includes Digital Station ports residing on the Combination MBMs G4x16 and G8x16 Use only proprietary Nortel Digital Station Sets for connection to digital ports and agency approved Analog devices for connection to the Analog Station ports The digital station ports of the Combination MBMs must not be connected to exposed plant Follow this procedure to install a media bay module MBM To install an MBM 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface With the face of the MBM toward you insert the MBM into the expansion unit Push the MBM completely into the expansion unit You
177. l tone at the ATA2 unnsensennensnnennnnnnnnnennnnnonnen nenn 170 Poach The Al AS WN ee ee ee 171 To perform a Level 1 and Level 2 rest aan 172 Replacing the BCM50 system components 20000eeeeees 175 Te Saul Gown tie SR ee 176 To eleganten taisia a 176 Replacing a power supply 0 0c eee e cece eee eee eee 177 To remove ING power alpinen 178 Toconnectihe new power SUC ae a 179 Replacing a main UNM 2 5 2s c wc ee tae eec anne na canes es 181 Toaissonnect tho sablea er na enn 182 To remove a rackmaunled main UN a 183 To remove a wall mounted man Unit ernennen 183 To remove a desktop mounted main unit 444 4u444HHHH0nnennnnnn nenn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnen nenn 183 To connect ihe cabl S een 184 Replacing a media bay module 0 0c eee cece eee eee 185 Goats ig sa NE MER ae 186 TG ns n the new MBM zes nie A ea sn naa SEERE ETEA ERTSE 187 Replacing an expansion unit auussnansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 189 To disconnect the expansion unit cables usssuuss4nnnsnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnn nn 190 To remove a rack mounted expansion unit 191 To remove a wall mounted expansion unit usssusennnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnn nenn 191 To remove a desktop mounted expansion unit uus urmnsnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnnnen nenn 191 To remove ihe MBM neuere euere 192 To connect tho cables Aa nene 193 Replacing an internal component sassssssansnsnnnnnnnnnnnn
178. lect the minimum required security for SNMP from the list SNMP Version Support Select the SMNP version support from the list 6 Click OK To configure SNMP community strings From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it From the Administrator Access folder select SNMP Select the Community Strings tab Click Add A OO N The Add Community String dialog box appears 5 Configure the Add Community String attributes See the table Add Community String attributes on page 147 Table 28 Add Community String attributes Attribute Description Community string Enter the name used as a key to uniquely identify an individual community entry on the SNMP agent Type of access Specify the read and write access for this community Available options are Read Only and Read Write 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add more community strings To configure the SNMP manager list Use the SNMP manager list to specify IP addresses that can connect to the SNMP agent 1 From the Configuration tab click the Administrator Access folder to expand it 2 From the Administrator Access folder select SNMP 3 Select the General tab It is normally selected by default 4 Inthe SNMP Manager List area click Add BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 148 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters The Add Manager dialog box appears Enter the
179. lephone Network must comply with these FCC rules e Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the preceding conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations See installation instructions for details e Use only an FCC Part 68 compliant Universal Service Order Code USOC network interface jack as specified in the installation instructions to connect to the Public Switched Telephone Network e If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of the product may be required But if advance notice isn t practical the telephone company will notify you as soon as possible You will also be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary Ringer Equivalence Number REN The REN provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5 EMI EMC FCC Part 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pu
180. level Note Nortel recommends the use of a plywood backboard to simplify installing multiple BCM50 units However due to the compact size and light weight of the BCMSO units a backboard is not required If you do not use a backboard use the appropriate wall anchors or ensure the screws are in a stud Mount the plywood backboard securely to the wall Place the wall mount bracket on the backboard and mark the location of the center keyhole shaped screw hole on the plywood backboard See the figure Wall mount bracket on page 89 NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 89 Figure 38 Wall mount bracket Attach the wall mount bracket with 5 screws e Two screws mount through the cable trough open the cable management door e Three screws mount as shown in the figure Note When you use three screws Nortel recommends installing the screws in the three holes labeled 1 or the three holes labeled 2 4 Prepare the wall mount bracket by removing the alignment tabs If this is the only unit in the BCMS50 system remove the alignment tabs on the right side of the wall mount bracket If this is the last unit on a BCM50 system with multiple units remove the alignment tabs on the left side of the wall mount bracket Place the additional wall mount bracket on the backboard on the right side of the existing wall mount bracket Use the alignment tabs to ensure the two wall mount brac
181. lines to the expansion units on page 113 if you add telephone lines e If your BCMS0 system has no other expansion unit proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115 For information about wiring the station MBMs e 4x16 wiring charts on page 231 e G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts on page 235 e DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts on page 239 e ASM8 ASMS and GASM wiring chart on page 243 Connecting the auxiliary equipment The main unit has connections for an auxiliary ringer an external paging system and a music source You can connect this auxiliary equipment through the auxiliary terminal block on the wiring field card WFC or the patch panel See the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional on page 119 or the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel optional on page 119 For information about connecting auxiliary equipment e Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116 e Connecting an external paging system on page 116 e Connecting an external music source on page 117 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 116 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system Connecting an auxiliary ringer An auxiliary ringer is a customer supplied piece of hardware that provides external ringing capability to telephones on the BCM50 system To install an auxiliary ringer 1 Use the installation instructions supplied with the ringer hardware to install the auxiliary ringer
182. lling an expansion unit To set G4x16 or G8x16 dip switches 1 Set the Module Select dip switches to on up See the figure G4x 16 G8x16 dip switch location on page 100 2 Set the Mode Country Select dip switches to off down this setting allows the MBM to automatically download the country profile settings Figure 47 G4x16 G8x16 dip switch location ON 4 OFF Module Select Rear of MBM LOTT Mode Country Select For information about line and DN settings see the table G4x16 G8x16 lines and DNs settings on page 100 Table 16 G4x16 G8x16 lines and DNs settings Expansion unit Module Card Lines DNs 1 05 01 065 068 G4X16 253 268 065 072 G8x16 2 07 01 095 098 G4X16 285 300 095 102 G8X16 To set GASM dip switches For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module set all switches to on 2 For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module set the switches according to the table GASM dip switch settings switch 1 3 on page 100 and the table GASM dip switch settings switch 4 8 on page 101 Table 17 GASM dip switch settings switch 1 3 Switch Description Setting Switch 1 Firmware download capability OFF Standard mode firmware downloading not supported ON Enhanced mode firmware downloading supported Switch 2 Set when the firmware is OFF if you want the GASM to download the firmware when downloaded fro
183. local loop for display and related services Part 1 On hook data transmission 66 34 1000 Mexico Yes None 1 Mexico general Specification June 3 60 40 700 New Zealand No UK based telephony with Australian tones None 1 PABX External Port Interface Requirements PTC 107 1989 ISSUE 1 2 Specification PTC 200 Requirements for Connection of Customer Equipment to Analogue Lines 3 PTC220 Requirements for Private Voice Networks connected to the PSTN ISDN DRAFT FOR COMMENT 12 February 2003 4 The document TNA 102 June 1996 5 The document TNA102 Amendment to Section 10 and new Section 12 pdf 66 34 740 North America Yes None 1 TIA EIA 716 Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Type 1 Caller Identity Equipment Performance Requirements 2 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si3050 DAA 3 si3050 pdf 60 40 700 Poland Yes None 1 Polish ASS_1_v1 doc 2 ITU T Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU Supplement2 Series E 01 94 66 33 700 PRC Yes DTMF CLID NOT supported on GATI or Legacy GATM4 8 1 Feature Description and Detailed Design Description documents of the existing GATI firmware 2 AN84 Digital Hybrid with the Si305x DAAs pdf 3 si3050 pdf 4 Chapter 8 done doc 5 PRC Fixed Telephone Network Caller Identity Delivery YDT1277 1 2003 doc 6 PRC Ringing and Tone for Telep
184. ls into the cable management tray of the wall mount bracket and connects to the RJ 21 telephony connector through a 50 pin header The WFC contains 12 eight pin modular jacks for digital stations 4 eight pin modular jacks for analog trunks and 4 eight pin modular jacks for analog stations The eight pin modular jacks accept RJ 45 or RJ 11 modular plugs A terminal block is available to connect auxiliary equipment A 50 pin header connects to the BCMSO See the figure Wiring field card on page 54 Note The four analog lines on the WFC are only available with the standard main units The four analog lines are not available with the BRI series b series main units Figure 21 Wiring field card H 50 pin header Terminal block e e o Connectors for Connectors Connectors digital stations for analog for analog trunks stations BCM50 components For descriptions of the BCM50 components e Power supply on page 55 e Power supply adapter cord international users on page 55 e Uninterruptable power supply on page 55 NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 55 e Hard disk on page 56 e Router card on page 59 e Cooling fan on page 57 e RJ 21 telephony connector on page 58 Power supply The power supply is an external device that connects to the BCM50 units See the figure BCM50 power supply on page 55 You must have one power supp
185. ly for each unit in your BCM50 system Figure 22 BCM50 power supply To BCM50 Power supply Power supply To wall unit cord cable NA shown outlet A BCM50 power supply is included with each main unit and expansion unit In addition international non North American users require a power supply adapter cord for each main unit and expansion unit Power supply adapter cord international users The power supply adapter cord is for international non North American BCMS0 users The cord connects to the power supply on one end and to the C 14 BCM50 power bar on the other end You require one power supply adapter cord for each power supply you want to connect to the power bar Uninterruptable power supply An uninterruptable power supply UPS is an optional device that maintains continuous operation during a power interruption or failure The UPS provides power source monitoring and battery backup activation so that critical BCMS50 functionality is maintained During a power failure the UPS provides sufficient time to either correct the problem or activate a contingency plan to sustain services The UPS performs a graceful shutdown of the BCMS50 two minutes before the UPS battery power is drained BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 56 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware The BCM50 supports American Power Conversion APC UPS devices that use a USB control interface The APC UPSs include the APC UPS
186. m Programming Administration Guide Device Configuration Guide Networking Configuration Guide Telset Administration Guide Telephones and Peripherals Telephony Device Installation Guide Digital Mobility DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide NN40010 302 T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide NN40110 300 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 34 Chapter 1 Getting started IP Telephony WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide NN40050 301 Call Pilot CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide User Guides There are no references to specific user guides How to get help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel Technical Support Web site http www nortel com support This site provides quick access to software documentation bulletins and tools to address issues with Nortel products More specifically the site enables you to e download software documentation and product bulletins e search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment e open and manage technical support cases Getting Hel
187. m the BCM50 _ the firmware version in the BCM50 is different from the for enhanced mode only version in the GASM default ON if you want the GASM to download the firmware whenever a cold start is performed for the BCM50 Switch 3 Enable or disable echo OFF Enables echo cancellation default cancellation ON Disables echo cancellation NN40170 305 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 101 Table 18 GASM dip switch settings switch 4 8 Switches 4 to 8 select the region for the GASM as follows Switch 4 Switch 5 Switch 6 Switch 7 Switch 8 North America OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF United Kingdom OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Australia OFF OFF OFF ON OFF Poland OFF OFF OFF ON ON 3 After you set the switches proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 To set GATM dip switches 1 For the dip switches on the left side at the rear of the module set all switches to on 2 For the dip switches on the right side at the rear of the module country profile switches set all switches to off The GATM downloads the country profiles automatically 3 After you set the switches proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 102 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit Warning Risk of shock Only qualified telecommunications service personne
188. minated with terminated with terminated with 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms 600 ohms Insertion loss on an ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 ATA2 to BCM50 internal call loss 3 0 dB 0 5 loss 3 0dB 0 5 loss 3 0dB 0 5 loss 3 0 dB 0 5 loss3 0dB 0 5 dB dB dB dB dB Insertion loss on an external call ATA2 to BCM50 loss 2 2 dB 1 0 dB BCM50 to ATA2 loss 0 5 dB 1 0dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3 0 dB 1 0 dB BCM50 to ASM loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3 0dB 1 0 dB BCM50 to ASM loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3 0 dB 1 0 dB BCM50 to ASM loss 0 5 dB 1 0 dB ASM to BCM50 loss 3 0 dB 1 0 dB BCM50 to ASM loss 0 5 dB 1 0dB BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 52 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Table 5 ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM and GASI analog device specifications Sheet 2 of 2 Specification ATA2 ASM8 ASM8 GASM GASI MWI type see Note Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter tone Stutter Tone Voltage MWI Reverse polarity Reverse polarity CO 120 V Voltage MWI Voltage MWI CO 120 V PBX 90 V Disconnect N A N A OSI EIA TIA 464 OSI EIA TIA 464 N A supervision types section section 4 5 10 2 4 4 5 10 2 4 4 5 10 2 5 1 4 5 10 2 5 1 Note The MWI type depends on the country profile and the MWI voltage shown is a maximum value BCM50 hardware The follow
189. mode Ringing service Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction service Off Off mode Restriction global N A 000 overrides 131440 Restriction filter 01 0 0 013 Service modes 1 1800 1866 1 13 1800 1877 1888 911 911 411 976 1976 1 976 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter 05 N A 00 gt 13 11 1800 Restriction filter 06 N A z Routing service Off Off mode Routing service No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 7 0 11 Default 7 00 12 01 17 011 18 1 11 411 3 911 3 Unknown number Variable N A length Public OLI Local number Variable 8 length National number _ Variable 9 length Handsfree Auto Auto Set capabilities Pickup group None i Allow redirect Disabled Enabled Call forward delay Enabled Enabled Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language English UIKEnglish first is default French Spanish Turkish NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 267 Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa Analog VSC None 1831 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC
190. modem For more information about modem configuration see the Networking Configuration Guide To configure the startup template for telephony services Note This procedure erases all the telephony programming that is currently on the BCM50 system 1 From the Administration tab click the Utilities folder to expand it Select Reset Click Cold Reset Telephony Services The Cold Reset Telephony dialog box appears 4 Configure the Cold Reset Telephony attributes See the table Cold Reset Telephony attributes on page 142 Table 23 Cold Reset Telephony attributes Attribute Description Region Specify the startup region Template Specify the startup template Start DN Specify the startup DN The default is 221 5 Click OK NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 143 To initialize voice mail 4 From the Configuration tab click Applications folder to expand it Select Voice Messaging Contact Center Click Launch CallPilot Manager The Quick Install Wizard form appears If your voice mail system is already initialized you do not see the Quick Install Wizard Instead you see the CallPilot Manager Main Menu Web page Configure the attributes on the Quick Install Wizard form For more information see the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide Configuring the startup parameters Use the following procedures to configure the startup
191. mount the ATA2 on a wall When using 0 5 mm wire 24 AWG select a location within 800 m 2600 ft of the BCMSO Allow 12 5 cm 5 in clearance for the line jack terminal jack and power supply connector Screw two 4 mm 8 screws into the wall 130 mm 5 25 in apart Leave 6 mm 0 25 in of the two screws showing 4 Align the slots at the back of the ATA2 unit over the screws Push the unit against the wall The line jack terminal jack and power supply connector must be at the top of the ATA2 See the figure ATA2 back view on page 126 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 126 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter Figure 57 ATA2 back view On A s _ Mounting keyhole slots Test insertion loss measurement The maximum loss for ATA2 to Central Office CO configuration must not exceed 10 dB See the figure Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone on page 126 Figure 58 Insertion loss from the CO to the analog telephone BCM50 ATA2 Analog telephone Central Office me oM Whiten ff E jj ATA2 to BCM50 lt O E E lt M __ _ 10B Max m BCM50 to ATA2 Longitudinal balance to ground 50 dB 60 to 4000 Hz With IEEE 455 1976 test Overload level 3 dB Measure the total insertion loss between the CO and analog device by using standard dial up test lines with a t
192. n 195 To open the man Unt CaSe Aenean tee eee ee ree er meee Peery eres hier eee rar een tree rer rere Rare 197 TG remove the hard Si kranke ANERE banal E 199 Tore mO ne T aa e pert cen OITE TERRA tree err EIER 200 WO remove h rouler garden 201 To inset the new hard diek ee era A UEA aneii 202 TO Meen NE new fafi ia A een en 204 To insert nee een 205 To glose the main Unit Base anne 206 RJ 21 telephony connector wiring Chart 000 e eee ee eee 209 Installation and Maintenance Guide 10 Task List BRI wiring chart sss 6600065 005 00d areren tsita r soss 213 LAN Ports Wiring chal 2 2 Re nennen 215 WAN ports wiring chart cscs scsi cee eer rriei seen nase nn 217 Expansion ports wiring chart 0000 e eee eee eee eee 219 DIM Wiring Chart fee ci ccsccies en ened anne bees 221 BRIM wining CRAM ssc nec rec des cic abeees se anna aan 223 DID wiring CHAN 422 2 en ie ein 225 GATM wiring Ghart iss aasaan rar na aan aan nennen 227 4X16 wiring Charts ana uaa un naar ianaanaieh 231 G4x16 and G8x16 wiring Charts 0 2 cee eee ee 235 DSM16 and DSM32 wiring charts 20 cee eee eee eee 239 ASM8 ASM8 and GASM wiring chart 00 eee ee ee eens 243 Market profile attributes 000 e eee eee eee eee 245 NN40170 305 11 Contents New in this release access ane ccs Geeeiacsscedetauasias 19 FOS gerseremeeeeiitrn 19 Regulatory Information 44 4 4s 0 nein 21 North America
193. n page 247 e Core parameters for market profiles on page 255 e Analog Trunk parameters on page 270 e GASM68 parameters on page 276 e GASI parameters on page 279 e ATA2 parameters on page 281 e Voicemail on page 284 e ISDN line services on page 287 e Analog and digital trunk types on page 287 Interface availability Some of the BCM50 interfaces are customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles Refer to the following tables for a list of interfaces available within each market profile e Analog interface availability by market profile on page 246 e Digital interface availability by market profile on page 246 Analog interfaces Analog interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden and Switzerland The symbols in the table Analog interface availability by market profile on page 246 are defined as follows v indicates full support The interface is available and is localized in the market profile indicates that functionality and support is limited The interface is available in the market profile but is not localized BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 246 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 54 Analog interface availability by market profile Legacy New G4x16 ASM CTM4 GATM4 GATM4 Legacy G8x1
194. n regulatory information 2 2222 eee rennen ernennen 21 Canadian Note cra reins era ner a rd ansehe 21 Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice 0000 22 Ringer Equivalence Number REN 20000 0c eee eee nenn 22 EMVEMG FCC Pat 1S 224s cncce rn 22 important safety inehuelans 2 une a a ee gt 23 SAN aaa EAEI EA TETEE E Eurer TTT 24 Enhanced 911 Comiguration lt csrricserererrererirseraiserer krisira 25 Radio frequency interference 22 00 2221 2420 Lu aaa aan aa 25 Telecommunication registration sank 25 International regulatory information 000 seen nennen eee 26 A eink oe bh ace eta Oakes Beal a ge 27 Additional safety information 00 00 cee eee 27 ITU standardization compliance 2 7 4u 4 ce nieces an ewes 28 Chapter 1 Pee Bo 2 gt VE EN EEE 29 ARGU iS MUS ac aan EELSTEN TTTS ATTA TEr Tra TTT 29 Ele ee EERTE ES eee ee E ee E ee re ee 29 MANS een 29 Symbols and text conventions s ersrssrresricrses viss en siska eee ennir 31 Related puDICANONS aan srl 33 Howto Gel RER era ae ei rn 34 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 00 ee eee eee nennen nenn 37 BRENNEN ice a a ana Be Sepak ra Can en re 37 BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules 2 222222 se seen 42 Media Day TEUER area re rer 44 BORIO CAEN an ae a ar a a rn an a 52 Rackmoum SHEN 2 002240 RR een 52 Palen Pale sc a I ed eGR ap ee Se eke eos 53 WAOU BISICKBT Saas seen he ar eee eek be
195. n the main unit This expansion unit is now designated as Expansion 2 in Element Manager Note When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit the LEDs on the expansion unit port light while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off Figure 50 Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2 fam n a a f z 2 1 iaa RS wm seed ei Buses 5 6 Buses 7 8 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 108 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system The expansion port you select determines the line and extension numbers of the devices connected to the expansion unit For the default line and extension numbers see the table Default line and extension numbers on page 108 If you have a second expansion unit repeat steps 1 to 3 for the second unit Table 19 Default line and extension numbers Default Default extension numbers line numbers Digital 221 232 061 064 Main unit Analog 233 236 Expansion port 1 237 268 065 094 Expansion port 2 269 300 095 124 The number and type of lines and extensions that are available on the expansion ports are determined by the MBM you install in the expansion unit Connecting the power supply An uninterruptible power supply UPS is an optional device that you connect to your BCM50 system The UPS provides battery backup for the BCM50 system to main
196. nd descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Trunk Types Description Digital Carrier Types T1 E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mbps North American 30 channels at 2048 Mbps Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program autoanswer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines T1 Digital Trunk Types DID This is a type of T1 trunk line used by an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM50 Loop This is a type of T1 line Use this type of line on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network This trunk must have disconnect supervision so you can set the trunk to autoanswer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but use these lines when the local service provider does not support disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system recognizes when a call is released at the far end E
197. ng the main unit 87 To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCMSO unit 2 Place the BCMSO unit on top of the other unit Make sure the feet of the unit are in the slots on the top of the unit and in front of the slots See the figure BCM50 unit slots and feet on page 87 Slide the unit back until it clicks in place on the slots Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation For details about installation options see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94 Figure 37 BCM50 unit slots and feet N En Nr o Ze Slots Feet _ i Le 3 ol KL ty h q A yy n 3 Installing the patch panel optional Install the optional patch panel in the equipment rack To install the patch panel a fF oa N a Determine the location in the rack where you want to install the patch panel Position the patch panel in the rack Align the holes in the patch panel with the holes in the equipment rack rails Fasten the patch panel to the rack using the four rack screws supplied with the patch panel Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the patch panel optional on page 119 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 88 Chapter 7 Installing the main
198. nge 7 p g Analog y s 7 Ring Orange Red telephone 33 Ti Red Green 8 p Analog 416 236 u 8 Ring Green Red telephone 34 No connection Red Brown 9 No connection er 9 No connection Brown Red 10 35 pP Red Slate Auxiliary 10 Ring Slate Red Ringer 36 Tip Black Blue 11 Page Relay Es 11 Ring Blue Black 37 Tip Black Orange 12 Page Output Z 12 Ring Orange Black 38 Tip Black Green 13 Music Source _ 13 Ring Green Black 39 Ti Black Brown iai 14 p Digital 412 232 _ 14 Ring Brown Black telephone 40 Ti Black Slate iqi 15 p Digital 411 231 15 Ring Slate Black telephone 41 Ti Yellow Blue igi 16 Da 410 230 a 16 Ring Blue Yellow telephone 42 Ti Yellow Orange ini 17 2 Da 409 229 a 17 Ring Orange Yellow telephone 43 Ti Yellow Green iqi 18 2 Da 408 228 en 18 Ring Green Yellow telephone 44 Ti Yellow Brown igi 19 P Dae 407 227 19 Ring Brown Yellow telephone 45 Ti Yellow Slate igi 20 Digital 406 226 20 Ring Slate Yellow telephone 46 Tip Violet Blue igi 21 Digital 405 225 21 Ring Blue Violet telephone 47 Ti Violet Orange ini 22 Digtal 404 224 z 22 Ring Orange Violet telephone NN40170 305 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart 211 Table 33 RJ 21 telephony connector wiring Sheet 3 of 3 Default line Device Pin Connection Wire color Type of device Port Default DN number 48 ITi Violet
199. ngs Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Ireland Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HKTA2015 ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HkTA2015 ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog N A N A GATv1 N A GATv1 GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 Conference tone No Yes No No No Yes supported Held line reminder Off Off Off Off Off Immediate Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings Transfer callback timeout After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings Network callback 30 30 30 30 N A 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A N A 600 600 600 N A Target line if busy PBX gt Busy PBX gt Busy Prime Prime Prime PBX gt Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime BRI ISDN Answer Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Auto
200. ns Use of a music source In accordance with U S Copyright Law a license may be required from the American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers or similar organization if Radio or TV broadcasts are transmitted through the Music On Hold or Background Music features of this telecommunication system Nortel hereby disclaims any liability arising out of the failure to obtain such a license Safety Business Communications Manager 50 BCM50 equipment meets all applicable requirements of both the CSA C22 2 No 60950 and UL 60950 Edition 3 A Danger Risk of shock Read and follow installation instructions carefully Ensure the BCM50 is not powered and that all telephone data cables are removed prior to opening the BCM50 unit in the field If installation of additional hardware and or servicing is required disconnect all telephone cable connections prior to unplugging the BCM50 modules Ensure the BCM50 is connected to a wall outlet with a third wire protective earth connection prior to connecting any telecommunications cables to the BCM50 main unit or expansion units NN40170 305 Regulatory information 25 Caution Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which they are exposed in performing a task and of measures to minimize the
201. ns seconds or e first in Level 1 reset state 3 button press Press reset switch ar s Awaiting Level 2 reset system proceeds to Wait five seconds Flashing red Flashing red confirmation Nortel factory mode do 4 not use System performs Level 2 reset all configuration Solid red Solid red i programming and Do not press reset 5 Press reset switch software updates switch system boots erased normally System rebooted and Solid green Solid green is ready for user action NN40170 305 Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components 175 Chapter 19 Replacing the BCM50 system components This section provides an overview of how to replace the BCM50 system components The figure Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components on page 175 shows the steps required to replace the BCMS50 system components This section also describes common procedures required to prepare the system for maintenance Figure 70 Overview of replacing the BCM50 system components Replace BCO components Replace the media bay module Replace expansion units Replace the fan Replace the main unit Replace the hard Replace the drive router Replace the power supply For information about replacing the BCM50 components e Replacing a power supply on page 177 e Replacing a main unit on page 181 e Replacing a media bay module on page 185 e Replacing an expansion unit on page 18
202. nter the user name and password defaults are shown below User name nnadmin Password PlsChgMe Click OK The Welcome to BCM Web page appears To download and install Element Manager From the Welcome to BCM Web page click BCM under Application Selection From the Application Launcher panel double click BCM Element Manager The BCM Element Manager pane appears Click Download Element Manager on the right side of the screen When BCMS50 Element Manager finishes downloading double click the application and follow the installation instructions To connect to the BCM50 system using Element Manager 1 Open Element Manager 2 From the Network menu select New Network Element and then select Business Communications Manager NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 141 9 0 BR Q Enter the BCM50 system IP address in the dialog box default is 10 10 10 1 Click OK From the Network Elements folder select the BCM50 system IP address Enter the following user name and password User name nnadmin Password PlsChgMe Click Connect You are now connected to the BCMS0 system Configuring the initial parameters Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCMS50 system using BCM5S0 Element Manager To enter a keycode on page 141 To configure the LAN IP address on page 141 To configure the modem on page 142 To configure the startup template for
203. ny connector on the main unit Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ 21 connector to the main unit e Ifyou use a straight RJ 21 connector use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it e Ifyou use a right angle RJ 21 connector use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector To secure the right side of the connector use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25 pair cable to the anchor on the main unit 6 Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog lines to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building Connect the four pairs of wires for the analog telephones to the local connecting blocks Connect the 12 pairs of wires for the digital telephones to the local connecting blocks NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 113 9 Select the appropriate option for your system e If your BCMS0 system has an expansion unit proceed to Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 113 or Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 e If your BCMS0 system has no expansion unit proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115 For detailed information about wiring the RJ 21 telephony connector see RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart on page 209 Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units Telephone lines connect to the expansion unit through the connectors on the MB
204. o the USB hub Plug one end of the second USB cable into the USB hub Plug the other end of the second USB cable into the USB port on the main unit Plug the UPS power cord into the AC power source wall outlet N Oo oO fF W Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110 To connect a power supply without a UPS 1 Unpack the new power supply 2 Check the power supply for damage If you find damage contact your Nortel representative Warning Do not use the power supply if the power supply cord or power supply A cable is damaged 3 Rotate the retention clip so the power outlet is open 4 Plug the power supply cord into the BCMSO unit Note Use only the power supply that is approved by Nortel for use with the BCM50 units BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 110 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system N OA Rotate the retention clip so that it locks the power supply cord in place Plug one end of the power supply cable into the power supply Plug the other end of the power supply cable into the AC power source wall outlet Repeat steps 1 to 6 for each BCM50 unit Warning Leakage currents You must reconnect the power cords to a grounded outlet before reconnecting the telephony and data networking cables Proceed to Connecting the lines and extensions on page 110 Connecting the lines and extensions The telephone lines and extensions connect to the BCM50
205. of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language UK English English Portuguese Spanish English English Danish first is French English English French French English default Spanish Spanish French Spanish Spanish Norwegian Turkish Swedish Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple None None None Simple Release On On On Off Off Off On code Tone 80 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF duration ms Palameis e Pause time 3 5 15 15 15 15 1 5 1 5 ms Interdigit 100 80 80 80 80 80 80 time ms Table 62 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Ireland parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong lreland Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 9 Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 0 default route NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 259 Table 62 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Ireland parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Telephony feature setti
206. of the connector To secure the right side of the connector use a cable tie to fasten the 25 pair cable to the anchor on the BCM50 main unit 12 Continue with the procedure To return the system to operation on page 176 NN40170 305 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module 185 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module This chapter describes the procedure for replacing a media bay module MBM The figure Overview of replacing an MBM on page 185 shows an overview of replacing the MBM Figure 73 Overview of replacing an MBM Replace a media bay module Remove the media bay module Insert the new media bay module Retum the BCO system to operation See the following procedures to replace an MBM e To remove the MBM on page 186 e To insert the new MBM on page 187 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 186 Chapter 22 Replacing a media bay module To remove the MBM 1 Use Element Manager to disable the MBM For more information about disabling an MBM see the Administration Guide 2 Ifthe expansion unit is wall mounted it must be removed from the wall mount bracket before you remove the MBM For more information see the procedure To remove a wall mounted expansion unit on page 191 and then proceed to step 7 3 Disconnect all of the telephone line and extension cables from the MBM If more than one cable exists mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them Rotate the
207. ol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN Global analog GATv2 GATv2 trunk versions NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 265 Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa Conference tone No Yes supported Held line reminder Off After 30 s Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 15 rings Transfer callback After 4 rings After 15 rings Telephony feature timeout settings Network callback 30 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 Link time ms 600 N A Target line if busy Prime Busy setting BRI ISDN Answer Manual Auto Mode Companding law A law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 System settings Number of rings in 1 2 a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes supported Mode Broadcast Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 rings 4 rings Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 17 00 End 07 00 End 08 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 00 00 End 23 00 End 00 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 00 00 End 13 00 End 00 00 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 266 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa Ringing service Off Off
208. omply with the European Safety requirements EN 60950 and EMC requirements EN 55022 Class A and EN 55024 These EMC limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial and light industrial environment A Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures The preceding warning is inserted for regulatory reasons If any customer believes that they have an interference problem either because their Nortel product seems to cause interference or suffers from interference they should contact their distributor immediately The distributor will assist with a remedy for any problems and if necessary will have full support from Nortel NN40170 305 Regulatory information 27 Safety Warning Only qualified service personnel may install this equipment The instructions in this manual are intended for use by qualified service personnel only Warning Risk of shock Ensure the BCM50 is unplugged from the power socket and that any telephone or network cables are unplugged before opening the BCM50 Read and follow installation instructions carefully Warning Only qualified persons should service the system The installation and service of this hardware is to be performed only by service personnel having appropriate training
209. omponents for damage during shipping If you find damage contact your Nortel representative N Warning Make sure the power supply to the expansion unit is disconnected before inserting or removing an MBM Verifying the media bay module switch settings Each MBM has dip switches on the back or underside of the module See the figure Switches on the media bay module not applicable for GASM or GATM on page 99 NN40170 305 Chapter 8 Installing an expansion unit 99 Figure 46 Switches on the media bay module not applicable for GASM or GATM ax Underside of MBM ELI a a a EP PET z r ka iy On Top of MBM dip switches Back of MBM Rear view of MBM Note The GASM and GATM MBMs have a dip switch configuration different gt from that shown in the figure Switches on the media bay module not applicable for GASM or GATM on page 99 For more information see the procedure To set GASM dip switches on page 100 and the procedure To set GATM dip switches on page 101 Verify that the dip switches for your MBMs are in the default factory positions If you install a DTM ADID4 ADID8 BRIM 4x16 DSM16 DSM32 or ASM8 ensure that all the switches are on which is the default setting for the MBM switches After you set the switches proceed to Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 100 Chapter 8 Insta
210. on page 143 For more information about using Element Manager see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Administration and Security The figure Overview of using Element Manager on page 139 shows an overview of using Element Manager to set the basic parameters Figure 61 Overview of using Element Manager Use Bement Manager to set the basic parameters Configure the initial parameters Configure the startup parameters BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 140 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters Prerequisites Business Element Manager has the following system requirements Operating System Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 or Windows Vista Business Element Manager also supports Citrix Presentation Server 4 0 RAM minimum 256 MB recommended 512 MB free space 75 MB Accessing the BCM50 system After you connect your computer to the BCM50 system either through the OAM port or through a LAN connection you can download BCM Element Manager from the Administrator Applications area of the BCM Web page You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require Element Manager You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer To access the BCM50 Web page 1 Open a Web browser and enter the BCM50 system IP address default is 10 10 10 1 The Enter Network Password dialog box appears E
211. onfiguration parameters You cannot set all the basic parameters using Telset Administration Therefore after configuring the initial parameters you must use Element Manager to set the startup parameters See Configuring the startup parameters on page 143 For more information about Telset Administration see the Telset Administration Guide The figure Overview of using Telset Administration on page 133 shows an overview of using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters Figure 60 Overview of using Telset Administration Use Telset Fdministration to set the basic parameters Configure the initial parameters Configure the startup parameters BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 134 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters Configuring the initial parameters Use the following procedures to configure the initial parameters for the BCM50 using Telset Administration To enter the keycodes on page 134 To configure the IP address on page 135 To configure the modem on page 135 To select the region on page 136 To select the telephony startup template and start DN on page 136 To initialize voice mail on page 136 To create Telset user accounts on page 136 To enter the keycodes Select Feature 9 8 from a two line display telephone Enter the following user ID and password User ID SETNNA Password CONFIG The numerical values of the user ID and password are 73
212. ong Kong North America Disconnect OSI Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supervision Busy Tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Line Reversal Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Specifications Standards used Refer to North Refer to North N A N A EIA TIA 464A America Specs America CS 03 Part Specs 7512 1 7512 2 ATA2 parameters This section contains information for the ATA2 device The ATA2 is either DR6 or DR7 mode The mode is determined by the region in which you are located and is not a modifiable user preference Refer to the following tables for a list of parameters in each mode e ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters on page 281 e ATA2 DR7 Market Support Transmission and Loop Interface parameters on page 283 e ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision Dial Pulse and DTMF parameters on page 284 ATA2 DR6 Table 75 ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Call Supervision Dial Pulse Market Loop Support Transmission Interface Duration ms Duration ms Dial Ringing Min Pulse Min Min Terminal Input Frequency Max Min Coding Max Max Market profile Localized Impedance Hz Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Australia Yes 220 Q 8
213. optional After the basic configuration finishes you can further customize your system by using the following configuration options e Configuring the media bay module on page 158 e Configuring modem settings on page 159 e Checking for software updates on page 159 e Configuring voice mail on page 159 e Customizing security policies on page 160 e Performing a backup on page 160 Configuring the media bay module For information about installing a media bay module MBM and setting the dip switches see Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 For details about connecting the cables between the main unit and expansion units you can also see Connecting the expansion unit on page 106 To configure the MBM s 1 Open Element Manager and connect to your BCMS0 system From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it From the Resources folder select Telephony Resources See the figure Telephony Resources page on page 158 Figure 64 Telephony Resources page ask Navigation Panel Telephony Resources Configuration Administration Modules welcome Basen E E Administrator Access I H O Resources Internal Application Resources Internal Media Gateways Port Ranges Expansion 1 a ITelephony Resources Expansion 2 Dial Up Interfaces H O Telephony H O Data Services H O Applications Internal Details for Module Expansion 1 Trunk Module Parameters Trunk Port D
214. opyright notices trademarks and all other proprietary legends and or logos of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers appearing on the original copy of such licensed software delivered to CUSTOMER and retain the same without alteration on all original copies and e Issue instructions to each of its authorized employees agents and or representatives to whom licensed software is disclosed advising them of the confidential nature of such licensed software and to provide them with a summary of the requirements of this License and e Return the licensed software and all copies through an Authorized Distributor to NORTEL NETWORKS at such time as the CUSTOMER chooses to permanently cease using it CUSTOMER shall not e Use licensed software i for any purpose other than CUSTOMER s own internal business purposes and ii other than as provided by this License or e Allow anyone other than CUSTOMER s employees agents and or representatives with a need to know to have physical access to licensed software or e Make any copies of licensed software except such limited number of object code copies in machine readable form only as may be reasonably necessary for execution or archival purposes only or e Make any modifications enhancements adaptations or translations to or of licensed software except as may result from those CUSTOMER interactions with the licensed software associated with normal use and explained in the a
215. or GATMS through the RJ 21 connector on the front of the media bay module MBM See the figure GATM RJ 21 connector on page 227 Figure 95 GATM RJ 21 connector GATM e llo Power Status GATM 1 26 RJ 21 connector 25 BE oan 50 RJ 21 pin out The table GATM4 RJ 21 connector wiring on page 227 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the GATM4 Table 45 GATM4 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 26 Tip White Blue 1 065 095 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 066 096 2 Ring Orange White 28 No connection White Green 3 No connection Green White 29 No connection White Brown 4 No connection Brown White 30 Tip White Slate 3 067 097 5 Ring Slate White 31 Tip Red Blue 4 068 098 6 Ring Blue Red 32 No connection Red Orange 7 No connection Orange Red BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 227 228 Appendix GATM wiring chart Table 45 GATM4 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 49 No connection Violet Brown 24 No connection Brown Violet 50 Tip Violet Slate Aux _ 25 Ring Slate Violet Note The AUX port supports full dat
216. orts pg p D channel ag B channel 1 OR ry dH B channel 2 Ii o Eii Il ig channe _ The table BRI port LED indicators on page 67 describes the possible BRI port LED states Table 12 BRI port LED indicators LED channel Status Description D On green D channel is functioning through this BRI port Bi On green B channel 1 is functioning through this BRI port B2 On green B channel 2 is functioning through this BRI port Media bay module LEDs expansion units only The two media bay module MBM LEDs on an expansion unit show the power and status of the MBM The figure MBM LEDs on page 67 shows the location of the O Power and Status LEDs on an MBM The power and status LEDs are in the same location on all MBMs Figure 30 MBM LEDs e II ee el Power Status BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 68 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs The table MBM LED descriptions on page 68 describes the possible MBM LED states Table 13 MBM LED descriptions Power Status Description Off Off The MBM has no power or a failure occurred on the MBM power converter On Off BCMS50 to expansion unit failure or system initialization On Blinking Hardware is working but an operational problem exists such as e no link to the main unit is detected e frame alignment is lost on messages from the main unit e bandwidth not allocated e
217. ou using rack wall or desktop mount Unpack the main unit Rack Desktop Wall Mount the shelf in Mount the wall the rack bracket Install the unit in Install the unit in the shelf Secure the power supply Install the unit on the desk top the bracket Secure the power supply Secure the power Install WFC or patch panel optional Connect the cables to the BCNS50 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 84 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit For information about installing the main unit e Unpacking the main unit on page 84 e Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84 e Installing the BCM50 unit on the wall on page 88 e Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 Unpacking the main unit Open the main unit box and check that you have all of the following components e one main unit either BCM50 BCM50a BCM50e BCM50b BCM50ba or BCMS50be e one power supply e one power supply cable e one power supply retention clip e four rubber feet e one screw to secure the RJ 21 telephony connector e one cable tie e adocumentation CD e the BCM50 Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide Visually inspect the components for damage during shipping If you find damage contact your Nortel sales representative Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack You can install a BCM50 main unit in a standard 19 inch equi
218. ounts screen appears 9 Press NEXT The password screen appears 10 Press CHNGE to change the password 11 Press NEXT to scroll through the list of available accounts 12 Press CHNGE to change the password for the selected account 13 Enter the new password for the account 14 Enter the new password again to confirm it For more information about creating user accounts using Element Manager see the procedure To create user accounts on page 148 Next step After you configure the initial parameters using Telset Administration you must configure the startup parameters using Element Manager For more information see Configuring the startup parameters on page 143 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 138 Chapter 13 Using Telset Administration to set the basic parameters NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 139 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters The Element Manager application provides a computer based client interface that can connect to devices over an IP network and display the programming interface for that device You can use the latest Element Manager version to manage all previous BCM systems that require Element Manager You need only one instance of Element Manager on your computer Through Element Manager you can configure all of the basic parameters e Configuring the initial parameters on page 141 e Configuring the startup parameters
219. ous 440 350 25 Continuous America Canada Yes 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous Caribbean No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America Denmark Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous France Yes 440 11 5 Continuous 400 17 5 Continuous Germany Yes 425 11 5 200 ms on 425 17 5 200 ms on 275 ms off 275 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms on 275 ms off 275 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms on 875 ms off 875 ms off Global No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America Holland Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous Hong Kong Yes 440 350 11 5 Continuous 440 350 17 6 Continuous lreland Yes 425 14 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Italy Yes 350 425 8 5 Continuous 350 425 17 5 Continuous Mexico No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America New Zealand Yes 400 13 Continuous 400 21 Continuous North America Yes 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous Norway Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Poland Yes 425 17 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous PRC Yes 450 11 5 Continuous 450 17 5 Continuous Russia Yes 425 10 Continuous 425 13 Continuous South Africa Yes 367 400 17 Continuous 367 400 25 Continuous Spain Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Sweden Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Switzerland Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Taiwan Yes 400 12 Continuous 400 20 Continuous NN40170 305 Appendix N Market pro
220. ove the fan 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Ensure the main unit case is open If necessary see Opening the main unit case on page 196 Remove the hard disk to access the fan cable See the procedure To remove the hard disk on page 199 4 Remove the fan cable from the header See the figure Location of fan on page 201 NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 201 Figure 82 Location of fan an 5 Lift the fan from the main unit and set it on a flat clean static free surface 6 Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201 To remove the router card 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface Ensure the main unit case is open If necessary see Opening the main unit case on page 196 Remove the three router card retaining screws Gently lift the back of the router card to disengage it from the card connector Slide the router card back so the modular connectors clear the bezel O a BP W N Lift the router card over the top of the LED pipes and place it on a flat clean static free surface 7 Proceed to Inserting the new component on page 201 Inserting the new component Use one of the following procedures to insert the new component e To insert the new hard disk on page 202 e To insert the new fan on page 204 To insert the new ro
221. p 2 Loop 3 Loop 4 Mi A A 1 J Power Status Global Analog Trunk Module The Global Analog Trunk Module GATM provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network lines This module supports both pulse and tone dialing as well as Caller ID and Disconnect Supervision in selected markets throughout the world The GATM uses an RJ 21 connector as the trunk interface The figure GATM faceplate on page 47 shows the GATM faceplate LEDs and RJ 21 connector The module is available either in four port GATMA4 or eight port GATMS8 configurations NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 47 Figure 12 GATM faceplate GATM mi Status Analog direct inward dialing media bay module The analog direct inward dialing ADID MBM provides an interface for four or eight analog public switched telephone network PSTN lines The ADID MBM supports both pulse and tone dialing as well as disconnect supervision and direct inward dialing call progress signaling as described in standard TIA 464C The ADID MBM uses an RJ 21 connector for trunk connections The figure ADID faceplate on page 47 shows the ADID faceplate LEDs and connectors The ADID is available either in four port ADID4 or eight port ADID8 configurations Figure 13 ADID faceplate lt 9 Power Status ADD Station media bay modules Station MBMs connect telephones and analog telecomm
222. p over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you don t find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support Web site and have a Nortel support contract you can also get help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the following Web site to obtain the phone number for your region http www nortel com callus NN40170 305 Chapter 1 Getting started 35 Getting Help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers you can use an Express Routing Code ERC to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel product or service To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 36 Chapter 1 Getting started NN40170 305 37 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware The Business Communications Manager 50 Release 3 0 BCM50 3 0 provides private network and telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM50 system e integrates voice and data capabilities IP Telephony gateway functions and data routing features in
223. panish Portuguese Norwegian EuroFrench Spanish Turkish Danish Italian Analog VSC None None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Detailed Release code On On On On On Off Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF ms parameters Pause time ms 1 5 3 5 1 5 3 5 1 5 3 5 80 100 80 100 80 100 Analog Trunk parameters The table Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters on page 271 contains information for the onboard GATI interface the G4x16 G8x16 MBM NT5B42AAABE5 NT5B42AAACE5 the new GATM4 8 MBM NT5B44BAABES5 NT5B44AAABE5 and the legacy GATM4 8 MBM NT5B44BAAA NT5B44AAAA in a BCM50R3 system Differences between the interfaces are noted in this table The 4x16 NTSB42AAAA and CTM4 8 MBMs are not covered in this table Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden and Switzerland The analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables e Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters on page 271 e Transmission parameters on page 273 e Call supervision parameters on page 274 e On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters on page 275 NN40170 305
224. pansion unit is mounted on top of another unit slide the expansion unit forward until it disengages from the clips of the other unit Go to step 6 If the expansion unit is not mounted on top of another unit continue to the next step If the expansion unit is secured to the rack mount shelf with screws remove these screws from the bottom of the rack mount shelf Slide the expansion unit forward until is disengages from the clips on the rack mount shelf Lift the expansion unit off of the rack mount shelf or other unit and set it on a flat clean static free surface Continue with the procedure To remove the MBM on page 186 To remove a wall mounted expansion unit 1 a Ff W N Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190 Lift the expansion unit until it disengages from the clips on the wall mount bracket Pull out the expansion unit and move it away from the wall mount bracket Set the expansion unit on a flat clean static free surface Proceed to Removing the MBM on page 192 To remove a desktop mounted expansion unit 1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190 If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit Lift the unit off the top of th
225. paring the system for maintenance on page 196 e Removing the main unit on page 196 e Opening the main unit case on page 196 e Removing an internal component on page 198 e Inserting the new component on page 201 e Closing the main unit case on page 206 e Installing the main unit on page 207 Special tools Before you replace the components ensure you have the following equipment e Phillips screwdriver 2 with a 3 5 inch blade e 3 16 inch slot screwdriver e antistatic wrist grounding strap Caution You must wear an antistatic grounding strap at all times when EA handling electronic components Failure to do so can result in damage to the equipment Preparing the system for maintenance If the system is still operating perform the procedure To shut down the system on page 176 After the system shuts down perform the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182 Removing the main unit The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted Use one of the following procedures to remove the BCM50 main unit e To remove a rack mounted main unit on page 183 e To remove a wall mounted main unit on page 183 e To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 183 Opening the main unit case This procedure is based on the assumption that you intend to perform maintenance activities Do not operate the main unit with the cover removed NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 197
226. pervision On hook MWI Caller Id Disconnect Supervision High Line Voltage Reversal Class Busy Line Market profile HV LR Tone MWI FSK support OSI Tone Reversal Australia Supported Not Supported Not Yes AUSTEL Supported Not Not 110 V supported supported TS 030 supported supported Bahrain Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported Canada Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported Caribbean Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported Global Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported Hong Kong Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported lreland Not Supported Supported Not Yes BT SIN227 Supported Not Not supported supported supported supported Mexico Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported New Zealand Not Supported Supported Not Yes BT SIN227 Supported Not Not supported supported supported supported North America Supported Not Supported Not Yes Bellcore Supported Not Not 120 V supported supported supported supported Poland Suppo
227. pment rack along with your other networking and telecommunications equipment To rack mount a BCM50 unit you need the optional rack mount kit NT9T6325 This kit provides the parts to mount up to four BCMSO units into a standard 19 inch equipment rack The BCMSO unit mounts into the tabs on the rack mount shelf These tabs prevent the unit from sliding around or falling off the shelf If the BCM50 system includes additional units you can mount another unit onto a second set of tabs on the rack mount shelf You can mount any additional units to tabs on the top of the other units If you need to better secure a BCM50 unit use the screws provided four per unit to screw the BCM5S0 to the rack This is a hardened installation For a hardened installation install only two units per rack do not stack the units You can also use the optional patch panel to simplify the connections to the BCM50 RJ 21 telephony connector Caution For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50 system see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79 NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 85 Caution To keep the BCM50 system operating at the optimal internal temperature keep the top sides and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment Place no objects except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure on top of the main unit Use th
228. pment to the BCM50 system The MBMs connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and stations For a list of trunk and station MBMs that can be used with your BCMS0 system see the table Trunk MBMs on page 45 and the table Station MBMs on page 47 For a complete list of MBMs with links to additional information see also the table Media bay modules on page 59 Ensure that the MBM dip switches are set correctly see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 Figure 7 BCM50 expansion unit connections Retention clip mounting hole MBM bay Ejector Expansion Power port Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports connectors and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Port connector Description LAN port port 1 An RJ 45 jack used to connect the customer LAN to the main unit The LAN port on the expansion unit connects to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN Power connector A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the expansion unit NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 43 Table 2 BCM50 expansion unit ports connectors and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Port connector Description Retention clip mounting hole A small hole into which you insert the retention clip The retention clip secures
229. port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 switch source connector Figure 3 BCM50e main unit ports and connectors WAN Additional LAN NEIRTEL Retention clip BCM500 mounting hole Power Expansion LAN Reset B Ru 21 telephony port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 switch source connector BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 40 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Figure 4 BCM50b main unit ports and connectors OAM LAN Expansion LAN f port 0 port 1 port2 port3 Music USB BRI ports sou rce Retention clip mounting hole Power Reset switch RJ 21 telephony connector Figure 5 BCM50ba main unit ports and connectors Additional LAN Retention clip mounting hole Power Expansion LAN Reset Music USB Ru 21 telephony portO port 1 port 2 port 3 switch source connector Figure 6 BCM50be main unit ports and connectors WAN Additional LAN Retention clip mounting hol Power Expansion LAN Reset Music B RJ 21 telephony port 0 port 1 port 2 port 3 switch source connector NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 41 Table 1 Main unit ports connectors and descriptions Port connector Description Power connector A barrel connector jack used to connect the power supply to the main
230. power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit Attach one end of the grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 7 Pullout the ejector lever with your index finger Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb and index finger and pull outward to disengage the MBM See the figure Pull out the ejector lever with your index finger Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb and index finger and pull outward to disengage the MBM See the figure Pull out the ejector lever with your index finger Then grasp the ejector lever with your thumb and index finger and pull outward to disengage the MBM See the figure Finish removing the MBM by hand on page 186 Finish removing the MBM by hand on page 186 Finish removing the MBM by hand Figure 74 Remove an MBM DSMIG e I Jolll e o Power Status Grasp the edge of the MBM ejector lever and pull outward 8 Grasp the top and bottom edges of the MBM Remove the MBM from the expansion unit Place the MBM on a flat clean static free surface Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wrist strap before you handle components Always place the components in a static free container 9 Continue with the procedure To insert the new MBM on page 187 NN40170 305 Chapter
231. proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115 To connect analog telephone lines to the GATM4 GATM8 or G4x16 G8x16 1 Read the warnings in Wiring warnings on page 111 Obtain a 25 pair cable with an RJ 21 connector on one end Plug the RJ 21 connector of the cable into the RJ 21 connector on the front of the MBM Use the lower RJ 21 connector on the G4x16 G8x16 MBMs to connect analog lines Select the appropriate option to secure the RJ 21 connector to the MBM e Ifyou use a straight RJ 21 connector use the two supplied screws on the sides of the connector to secure it e Ifyou use a right angle RJ 21 connector use the supplied screw on the left side of the connector to secure the left side of the connector To secure the right side of the connector use the supplied cable tie to fasten the 25 pair cable to the anchor on the MBM Connect the other end of the cable to the telephone company demarcation blocks of the building Select the appropriate option for your system e If your BCMSO system has another expansion unit repeat this procedure if you add more telephone lines or proceed to Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 if you add extensions e If your BCMS0 system has no other expansion unit proceed to Connecting the auxiliary equipment on page 115 For information about wiring the trunk MBMs DTM wiring chart on page 221 BRIM wiring chart on page 223 GATM wiring chart on page 227 4x16
232. quipment proceed to Connecting an external paging system on page 116 or Connecting an auxiliary ringer on page 116 e When you finish adding auxiliary equipment proceed to Next step on page 120 To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional 1 8 Plug the RJ 21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ 21 telephony connector The cable is now permanently connected to the RJ 21 telephony connector Remove the terminal block from the WFC a Slide a small flat screwdriver into the rectangular opening at the back of the terminal block b Pry the terminal block so the top rotates forward and the block comes free Make the connections to the terminal block while it is removed from the header Use a small slotted screwdriver to unscrew the wire hole screws on top of the terminal block Insert the bare wire ends 6 mm or 0 25 in in the appropriate holes on the sides of the terminal block Tighten the screws to hold the wires in place Reinstall the terminal block on the header of the WFC Connect the remaining wires digital telephones analog telephones and analog trunks to the WEC The eight pin modular jacks on the WFC accept RJ 45 or RJ 11 modular plugs Connect cables to the main unit as required To connect the cables to the patch panel optional 1 2 Plug the RJ 21 end of the cable assembly into the RJ 21 telephony connector Plug the other end of the cable assembly into the patch panel header The cable loc
233. r of this License shall continue in full force and effect This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the use of the licensed software and the associated documentation and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements written or oral regarding such subject matter No amendment to or modification of this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by a duly authorized representative of NORTEL NETWORKS Open source copyright ppp 2 4 This product contains software that is distributed under open source agreements This product contains ppp 2 4 a package which implements the Point to Point Protocol PPP to provide Internet connections over serial lines This open source package is freely downloadable at ftp ftp samba org pub ppp The following copyright notices apply to this software Copyright C 2002 Roaring Penguin Software Inc Permission to use copy modify and distribute this software for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted provided that this copyright and permission notice appear on all copies and supporting documentation the name of Roaring Penguin Software Inc not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the program without specific prior permission and notice be given in supporting documentation that copying and distribution is by permission of Roaring Penguin Software Inc Roaring Penguin Software Inc makes
234. ransmission test set for example Hewlett Packard 4935A Transmission Test Set NN40170 305 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter 127 To measure the insertion loss from the CO to the analog device 1 Establish a connection to the 1 mW 1 kHz CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2 2 Ensure that the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms e Replace the analog telephone with the test set e Use RECEIVE 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Ensure that the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops Remove the single line telephone Measure the 1 kHz tone at the far end of the analog port where the analog loop ends and where the analog device connects Note The tone must be greater than 10 dB for example 9 dB is acceptable To measure the insertion loss from the analog device to the CO 1 Establish a connection to a silent termination on the CO service line with an analog telephone attached to the ATA2 2 Make sure the analog port terminates correctly in 600 ohms by e Replace the analog telephone with the test set e Use TRANSMIT 600 OHM HOLD mode on the test set 3 Make sure the test set connects in parallel to the service line before removing the analog telephone or the line drops Remove the analog telephone Introduce a 1 kHz tone into the analog line at 10 dBm and measure the level at the CO
235. rap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Insert the new fan into the fan slot in the bottom of the BCM50 case NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 205 Ensure the fans are oriented so air flows out of the unit Note Ensure the label of the new fan faces the back of the BCM350 unit Air must flow out of the unit as indicated by the arrows imprinted on the fan Connect the fan cable to the header Ensure your route the fan cable through the cutouts under the hard disk and bracket Also make sure that you secure any slack in the fan cable with the clips on the hard disk bracket See the figure Cable routing on page 204 Note Do not force the cable The connectors on the fan cable prevents you from inserting the cable backwards If you cannot insert the cable properly check that the raised edge on the fan cable connector faces the plastic tab on the header 5 6 Insert the hard disk See the procedure To insert the new hard disk on page 202 Continue with the procedure To close the main unit case on page 206 To insert the new router card 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface With the back of the router card raised enough to clear the LED pipes align the modular connectors on the router card with the corresponding holes in the bezel Move the router card forward until the front edge of the c
236. rated router The DHCP server on the integrated router supplies the information primary and secondary TPS server information VLAN IDs to the IP Phones enabling the phones to connect to the BCM50 If the IP address of the integrated router changes then the IP address reserved for the BCM50 automatically changes The DHCP server on the integrated router automatically updates the S1 and S2 IP address For more information about configuring a DHCP server for your BCM50 main unit see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 144 BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 74 Chapter 4 Determining DHCP server configuration and IP address NN40170 305 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system 75 Chapter 5 Installing the BCM50 system To install a BCM50 system you must install a BCM50 main unit any expansion units required and the telephony components The figure BCM50 installation overview on page 75 and the table BCM50 installation overview on page 76 provide an overview of the installation process Figure 33 BCMS50 installation overview Install the BChHO system Check the installation prerequisites Install the main unit Do you want to install an expansion unit No Install a media bay module Connect the cables to the BCO Install the telephones and peripherals Install the expansion unit Do you want to install a second expansion unit No
237. razil 425 11 5 1son 4s off Silence Silence CALA 440 480 16 2son 4s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off Canada 440 480 16 2son 4s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off Caribbean 440 480 16 2son 4s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off Denmark 425 11 5 1son 4s off Silence Silence France 440 11 5 1 5son 3 5 s off Silence 440 450 14 5 Continuous Germany 425 11 5 1son 4s off Silence Silence Global 440 480 16 2son 4s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off Holland 425 11 5 1son 4s off Silence Silence Hong Kong 440 480 11 5 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 3 s off Silence Silence Ireland 400 450 14 5 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Silence 400 450 14 5 Continuous Italy 425 1son 4s off Silence Silence Mexico 440 480 16 2son 4s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off New Zealand 400 450 14 5 400 ms on 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off Silence 440 480 14 5 Continuous North America 440 480 16 2son 4 s off Silence 440 480 16 2son 4 s off Norway 425 11 5 1son 4 s off Silence Silence Poland 425 17 5 1s on 4 s off Silence Silence
238. rd in capital letters shown in the bottom line of a two line display telephone Psd PLAY Command line prompts on display telephones Display options on two line display telephones Press the button directly below the option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option These text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names options and text that you must enter text Example Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles NN40170 305 Chapter 1 Getting started 33 Convention Description plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the corresponding icon on the HOLD telephone you are using RELEASE Related publications This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide Two publication types are available Technical Documents on page 33 and User Guides on page 34 Technical Documents System Installation BCM 5 0 Upgrade Guide Installation Checklist and Quick Start Guide Keycode Installation Guide R2MFC Media Bay Module Installation and Configuration Guide NN40010 300 Syste
239. re available for the BCMS0 system Table 3 Trunk MBMs Module type Function Special notes DTM see Digital trunk media bay module on page 45 Connects digital public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3 0 system Can connect to T1 or PRI E1 T1 interfaces BRIM see Basic rate interface media bay module on page 46 GATM4 GATM8 see Global Analog Trunk Module on page 46 Connects a maximum of four ISDN BRI S T interfaces Connects either four GATM4 or eight GATM8 analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 3 0 system ADID4 ADID8 see Analog direct inward dialing media bay module on page 47 Connects either four ADID4 or eight ADID8 analog DID interfaces R2MFC Provides MFC R2 connectivity over an E1 trunk For details about the R2MFC MBM see the R2MFC Media Bay Module Installation and Configuration Guide NN40010 300 Note See Market profile attributes on page 245 for supported regions Digital trunk media bay module The digital trunk media bay module DTM connects to a standard digital PSTN Tl or El carrier e On North American BCM50 systems the DTM connects a T1 24 channel or PRI 23 channel circuit to the BCMS0 This PRI interface supports the NI 2 and MCDN protocol variants e On International BCMSO systems the DTM connects a 30 channel PRI DASS2 or DPNSS circuit to the BCMS50 This PRI interface supports the ETSI E
240. re properly seated and are connected to the correct ports with proper LED indications Check that the switches on the MBM are all set to on For more information about these switches see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 If the MBM is a GASM or GATM all the switches on the right are not on For information about setting these switches see Verifying the media bay module switch settings on page 98 To check the MBM switches you must remove the MBM from the expansion unit For instructions see Replacing a media bay module on page 185 Perform a firmware download to ensure that the correct version is loaded on the ASM GASM or GATM unit Use Element Manager or Telset Admin to check the programming for the lines or extensions connected to the MBM Reboot the system to ensure that the BCM50 main unit functions correctly If the programming is incorrect use the Backup and Restore Utility to load a recent backup of system programming If a recent backup is not available correct the programming using Element Manager or the Telephone Administration feature To test the MBM 1 Check the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM Both LEDs must be solid green If either LED is not solid green a problem exists with the MBM For a detailed description of the LED states see Media bay module LEDs expansion units only on page 67 Perform a call test to make sure the new MBM functions correctly If you replaced a station MBM
241. ree container 4 Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 193 Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit To insert the MBM in the new expansion unit see Installing a media bay module in an expansion unit on page 102 Proceed to Installing the new expansion unit on page 193 NN40170 305 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 193 Installing the new expansion unit Use one of the following procedures to install the new expansion unit Installing the BCM50 unit in an equipment rack on page 84 Installing the BCMS50 unit on the wall on page 88 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 After you install the new expansion unit continue with the procedure To connect the cables on page 193 To connect the cables No oO FPF WO DD Insert the power supply retention clip into the new expansion unit Rotate the power supply retention clip so that the power supply jack is clear Connect the power supply cord to the expansion unit Rotate the power supply retention clip to lock the power supply cord in place Connect the expansion cable to the expansion port on the front of the expansion unit Connect the LAN cable to the LAN port on the front of the expansion unit if applicable Connect all of the telephone line and extension cables to the MBM inserted in the expansion unit To ensure the same line and extension numbering make sure you connect the cables to the ports from which you removed t
242. rents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet Proceed to Removing the main unit on page 182 Removing the main unit The method you use to remove the main unit depends on how the unit is mounted Use one of the following procedures to remove the main unit To remove a rack mounted main unit on page 183 To remove a wall mounted main unit on page 183 To remove a desktop mounted main unit on page 183 NN40170 305 Chapter 21 Replacing a main unit 183 To remove a rack mounted main unit 1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182 2 Ifaunit is mounted to the top of the main unit slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the main unit Lift the unit off of the top of the main unit 3 Ifthe main unit is secured to the rack mount shelf with screws remove these screws from the bottom of the rack mount shelf Slide the main unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the rack mount shelf Lift the main unit off of the rack mount shelf and set it on a flat clean static free surface Proceed to Installing the new main unit on page 183 To remove a wall mounted main unit 1 Ensure you remove all the cables from the main unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the cables on page 182 Lift the main unit until it
243. requirements Power must be supplied from a non switched unobstructed outlet within 1 5 m 5 ft of the BCM50 units The supplied power must be a dedicated 110 V to 120 V AC nominal or 220 V to 240 V AC nominal 50 to 60 Hz 15 A minimum service with a third wire safety ground The third wire safety ground provides shock protection and prevents electromagnetic interference BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 80 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites Danger Risk of electric shock The safety of this product requires connection to an outlet with a third wire ground Use only with the supplied BCM50 power supply and a three wire power outlet Caution Check ground connections Ensure that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metal water pipe system if present are connected If these ground connections are not connected contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority Do not try to make the connections yourself You can connect the power supply to a power bar The total length of the power cables from the power supply to the electrical outlet including power bar must not exceed 2 m 6 5 ft You must use a power bar approved by an appropriate National Test Body with a third wire ground Nortel recommends that you do not use an extension cord between the power supply and the power bar or between the power bar and the electrical outlet
244. rogramming techniques employed therein In order to maintain the trade secret status of the information contained within the licensed software the licensed software is being delivered to CUSTOMER in object code form only NORTEL NETWORKS or any of its suppliers holding any intellectual property rights in any licensed software and or any third party owning any intellectual property rights in software from which the licensed software was derived are intended third party beneficiaries of the License All grants of rights to use intellectual property intended to be accomplished by this License are explicitly stated No other grants of such rights shall be inferred or shall arise by implication CUSTOMER warrants to NORTEL NETWORKS that CUSTOMER is not purchasing the rights granted by this License in anticipation of reselling those rights CUSTOMER shall e Hold the licensed software in confidence for the benefit of NORTEL NETWORKS and or NORTEL NETWORKS suppliers using no less a degree of care than it uses to protect its own most confidential and valuable information and e Keep a current record of the location of each copy of licensed software made by it and e Install and use each copy of licensed software only on a single CPU at a time for this purpose single CPU shall include systems with redundant processing units and e Affix to each copy of licensed software made by it in the same form and location a reproduction of the c
245. rsuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment NN40170 305 Regulatory information 23 Important safety instructions The following safety instructions cover the installation and use of the Product Read carefully and retain for future reference Installation N Warning To avoid electrical shock hazard to personnel or equipment damage observe the following precautions when
246. rt 219 expansion unit 219 GATM4 227 GATM8 227 LAN port 215 main unit 217 219 WAN port 217 wiring field card WFC 92 wiring requirements 80 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide
247. rted Not Supported Not Yes ETSI Supported Not Not 110 V supported supported supported supported United Kingdom Not Supported Supported Not Yes BT SIN227 Supported Not Not supported supported supported supported GASI parameters This section contains information for the onboard GASI interface GASI interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Ireland Italy Mexico New Zealand Norway Poland PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan UK Note that the GASI currently has not been localized for markets except North America The GASI will function in some profiles outside of North America however the interface will respond with North American characteristics The GASI parameters are provided in the following tables BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 280 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 74 GASI parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Market Profile On hook Caller ID Aspect Parameter Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong North America Market Support Localized Yes Yes No North No North Yes American American Based Based A Law A Law Transmission Terminal Input 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q Impedance Nominal Network 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q Input Impedance PCM Coding mu Law mu Law A Law mu Law mu Law Scheme Loop Interf
248. s See the figure Slide in the WFC on page 92 Figure 42 Slide in the WFC 4 Press the WFC firmly at the top left corner center and right tabs The WFC snaps into place See the figure Snap the WFC into place on page 92 Figure 43 Snap the WFC into place 5 Optional lInstall the three screws to secure the WFC in place 6 Continue with the procedure To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional on page 119 NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 93 Installing the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf To mount a BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of the unit If the BCMS50 system includes additional units you can set the additional units beside or stack them on top of the first unit If you are mounting the additional units beside the first unit attach the supplied rubber feet to the bottom of each unit If you are stacking the additional units on top of the first unit mount each unit into the tabs on top of another unit Caution For acceptable environmental conditions before selecting a location for the BCM50 system see Checking the installation prerequisites on page 79 Note To keep the BCM50 unit operating at the optimal internal temperature keep the top sides and rear clear of obstructions and away from the exhaust of other equipment Place no objects except another BCM50 unit or a power supply mounting enclosure on top of the main
249. sion cable from the expansion port on the expansion unit Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN port on the expansion unit Disconnect all of the telephone lines and extension cables from the MBM inserted in the expansion unit If more than one cable exists mark the cables to identify the port from which you removed them Rotate the power supply retention clip to free the power supply cord Remove the power supply cord from the expansion unit Warning Leakage currents You must disconnect the telephony and data networking cables from the system before disconnecting the power cord from a grounded outlet Proceed to Removing the expansion unit on page 190 Removing the expansion unit How you remove the expansion unit depends on how the unit is mounted Use one of the following procedures to remove the expansion unit To remove a rack mounted expansion unit on page 191 To remove a wall mounted expansion unit on page 191 To remove a desktop mounted expansion unit on page 191 NN40170 305 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit 191 To remove a rack mounted expansion unit 1 7 Ensure you remove all the cables from the expansion unit If necessary see the procedure To disconnect the expansion unit cables on page 190 If a unit is mounted to the top of the expansion unit slide that unit forward until it disengages from the clips on the expansion unit Lift the unit off the top of the expansion unit If the ex
250. sion unit Use the following test to ensure the expansion unit is operating properly 1 Make sure that the BCM50 system is fully booted For indications that the system is fully operational see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61 Check the power and status LEDs on the MBM that is inserted in the expansion unit Both LEDs must be solid green If either LED is not solid green a problem exists with the MBM or the expansion unit For a detailed description of the LED states see Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs on page 61 If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports extensions go to an extension that is connected to the MBM Check for a dial tone Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system If the expansion unit has an MBM that supports lines go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs Check for a dial tone Make a call using the line or line pool To troubleshoot the expansion unit Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode Check that the expansion port is connected to the proper connector For location of the LAN ports see the figure Expansion ports on page 106 and the figure Connecting the expansion unit to the BCM50 main unit on page 107 NN40170 305 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality 169 Check the wiring to the MBM Make sure that the cables a
251. ssociated documentation or e Attempt to reverse engineer disassemble reverse translate decompile or in any other manner decode licensed software in order to derive the source code form or for any other reason or e Make full or partial copies of any documentation or other similar printed or machine readable matter provided with licensed software unless the same has been supplied in a form by NORTEL NETWORKS intended for periodic reproduction of partial copies or e Export or re export licensed software and or associated documentation by downloading or otherwise from the fifty states of the United States and the District of Columbia PLEASE REFER TO THE NEXT PAGE Installation and Maintenance Guide 4 Except for Java Product as defined herein below CUSTOMER may assign collectively its rights under this License to any subsequent owner of the associated hardware but not otherwise subject to the payment of the then current license fee for new users if any No such assignment shall be valid until CUSOMTER 1 has delegated all of its obligations under this License to the assignee and 2 has obtained from the assignee an unconditional written assumption of all such obligations and 3 has provided NORTEL NETWORKS a copy of such assignment delegation and assumption and 4 has transferred physical possession of all licensed software and all associated documentation to the assignee and destroyed all archival copies Except
252. st unit You can install another unit on top of each of the first two units Nortel recommends a maximum of four units per rack mount shelf Select your installation option e To install the BCMSO unit on the rack mount shelf on page 86 e To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 87 To install the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf 1 Place the BCM50 unit on the rack so that the feet of the unit are in the depressions in the shelf Move the unit forward until the feet touch the front side of the depressions Slide the unit back until the feet click in place on the slots in the depressions See the figure Attach the units to the rack mount shelf on page 86 4 To further secure the unit use the four self tapping screws for plastic supplied with the rack mount kit to attach the unit to the rack mount shelf Make sure the screw holes in the unit are aligned with the holes in the rack mount shelf Then insert the four screws through the holes in the bottom of the shelf and into the screw holes in the bottom of the unit Caution Use only the screws supplied with the rack mount kit NT9T6325 Do not replace the screws Other screws can damage the unit 5 Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation For details about installation options see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94 Figure 36 Attach the units to the rack mount shelf NN40170 305 Chapter 7 Installi
253. starting and initializing the system e replacing components e testing the system Audience The BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide is directed to installers who install configure and maintain BCM50 3 0 systems To use this guide you must e bean authorized BCM50 3 0 installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM50 terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 1 of 3 Acronym Description ACU Audio conference unit Als Alarm indication system APC American Power Conversion BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 30 Chapter 1 Getting started Table 1 Acronyms Sheet 2 of 3 Acronym Description ASM Analog station module analog station media bay module ATA Analog terminal adapter BCM Business Communications Manager BRI Basic rate interface BRI CNIC Basic rate interface compact network interface card BRIM Basic rate interface module basic rate interface media bay module CAP Central answering position CFA Carrier failure alarm CLID Calling line identification CNIC Compact network interface card co Central office CSU Channel service unit CTM Caller ID trunk module caller ID trunk media bay module DDIM Digital drop an
254. system If necessary reformat the USB storage device by plugging it into a USB port on your computer right clicking the USB device icon and selecting FAT32 reformatting This destroys any data on the USB RJ 21 telephony connector An RJ 21 port used to connect telephony devices to the main unit The four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector are available only with the Standard series main units The BRI series main units include onboard BRI ports instead of the analog lines BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 42 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Warning External equipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page IN output and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules In addition to a main unit the BCM50 system can have up to two BCMS0 expansion units An expansion unit connects to the main unit and provides additional functionality For expansion unit port locations and descriptions see the figure BCM50 expansion unit connections on page 42 and the table BCM50 expansion unit ports connectors and descriptions on page 42 The BCM50 expansion unit accommodates one media bay module MBM that connects additional telephony equi
255. system through an RJ 21 telephony connector on the front of the main unit and to the connectors on the MBM installed in the expansion units You can also use the optional wiring field card WFC to simplify the connection of the lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector in a wall mount or desktop mount installation For rack mount installations you can use the optional rack mount patch panel For information about connecting lines and extensions Wiring warnings on page 111 Connecting lines and extensions to the RJ 21 telephony connector on page 112 Connecting telephone lines to the expansion units on page 113 Connecting extensions to the expansion units on page 114 To connect the cables to the wiring field card optional on page 119 NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 111 Wiring warnings Read the following warnings before you connect any telephone lines or extensions to the BCM50 system Warning Electrical shock warning The MBMs are safety approved for installation into the expansion unit The installer and user must ensure that installation of the hardware does not compromise existing safety approvals BEFORE YOU OPEN the main unit or expansion unit ensure that the network telecommunication cables are unplugged and the unit is disconnected from the AC power source Station modules Connect the ports on these modules only to approved digital telephones and peripherals with
256. t configurations for connecting analog and data devices to the main unit using an ATA2 e Analog telephone on page 123 e Analog data device on page 124 Analog telephone The figure Analog telephone installation overview on page 123 shows an installation overview for connecting an analog device through an ATA2 to the main unit Figure 53 Analog telephone installation overview ATA2 power cord Analog telephone BCMS5O eg mn ena BHE gt Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 1300 ohms maximum BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 124 Chapter 11 Installing the analog terminal adapter Analog data device The ATA2 connects a standard analog data device such as a fax or modem to the BCM50 system The figure Data communication device installation overview on page 124 shows an installation overview for connecting a data communication device through an ATA2 to the BCMS0 system Figure 54 Data communication device installation overview ATA2 power cord Data communication BCM50 device Sn mi Line loop resistance Terminal loop resistance 135 ohms maximum 200 ohms maximum Installing the ATA2 This section provides information about installing the ATA2 e Connecting the ATA2 on page 124 e Mounting the ATA2 on page 125 e Test insertion loss measurement on
257. ta FS256 Transmit Data Ethernet Transmit Data OIJ AJOJN BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 220 Appendix E Expansion ports wiring chart Table 39 Expansion port wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Pin Signal 7 FS256 Receive Data 8 FS256 Receive Data NN40170 305 Appendix F DTM wiring chart 221 Appendix F DTM wiring chart The digital telephone line connects to the Digital Trunk Module DTM through the RJ 48c jack on the front of the media bay module MBM See the figure DTM RJ 48C port on page 221 Figure 92 DTM RJ 48C port DTM 12345678 oe 2686 o O B OS O Power Status RJ 48C pin out Bantam jack RJ 48C jack The table DTM RJ 48c port wiring on page 221 and the table DTM line numbering on page 221 list the wiring details for the RJ 48C port Table 40 DTM RJ 48c port wiring Pin Signal a Receive Ring Receive Tip Receive Shield Transmit Ring Transmit Tip Transmit Shield No connection Orn IO oa AJOJN No connection Table 41 DTM line numbering Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line type Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 T1 065 088 095 118 PRI 065 087 095 117 E1 065 094 095 124 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 222 Appendix F DTM wiring chart NN40170 305 Appendix G BRIM wiring
258. tain continuous operation during a power interruption or failure For more information about the UPS see Uninterruptable power supply on page 55 When connecting a UPS you must use a USB hub between the UPS and the BCM50 system Note For the UPS to function correctly you must first connect it before you power up the BCM50 system If you connect a UPS to a running system the UPS does not function Note International non North American users require the power supply adapter cord to connect the power supply to the special power bar For more information see Power supply adapter cord international users on page 55 The figure Connect a UPS on page 109 shows how to connect the UPS NN40170 305 Chapter 9 Connecting the cables to the BCM50 system 109 Figure 51 Connect a UPS UPS Main unit nore E T 1 TI USB hub USB cable Power supply If your BCMSO system does not have a UPS continue with the procedure To connect a power supply without a UPS on page 109 To connect a power supply using a UPS 1 Mount the UPS within 1 5 meters 5 ft of the BCM50 units The UPS must be close enough to the BCM50 units that you can connect the power supply to both the UPS and the BCM50 units 2 Plug one end of the USB cable into the USB port on the UPS For information about the location of the ports on the UPS see the UPS documentation Plug the other end of the USB cable int
259. tallation and Maintenance Guide 130 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system Initial parameters overview The initial parameters are the required parameters that you can configure using Telset Administration Element Manager or the Startup Profile See the table Initial parameters on page 130 for a list of the initial parameters Table 20 Initial parameters Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile Keycode Feature 9 8 gt Feature codes Configuration gt System gt Keycode Keycodes IP address Feature 9 8 gt IP Address Configuration gt System gt IP Address e Obtain dynamically IP Subsystem e IP address e IP subnet mask e Default gateway Modem Feature 9 8 gt Modem Configuration gt Resources Modem e Enable disable modem gt Dial Up interfaces System Feature PROFILE Administration gt Utilities gt System e Region Reset gt Cold Reset Telephony Services Telephony startup Feature STARTUP Administration gt Utilities gt Telephony Startup e Template Reset gt Cold Reset Start DN Telephony Services Voice mail Feature 983 Configuration gt Voice Mail Startup e Attendant DN Applications gt Voice Messaging Contact Center e Ulstyle e Language e From Line e To Line e Number of rings User account e Telset user ID numeric e Telset password numeric Feature 9 8 gt User Accounts Configuration gt Administrator Access gt Acco
260. te Green 3 No connection Green White 29 Noconnection White Brown 4 No connection Brown White 3 30 Tip White Slate i 067 097 5 Ring Slate White 4 31 Tip Red Blue 068 098 6 Ring Blue Red 32 No connection Red Orange 7 No connection Orange Red The following part of the wiring chart applies only to the G8x16 MBM 33 Noconnection Red Green 8 No connection Green Red 5 34 Tip Red Brown 073 103 9 Ring Brown Red 6 35 Tip Red Slate 074 104 10 Ring Slate Red 36 No connection Black Blue 11 No connection Blue Black 37 No connection Black Orange 12 No connection Orange Black 7 38 Tip Black Green 075 105 13 Ring Green Black 8 39 Tip Black Brown 076 106 14 Ring Brown Black 40 No connection Black Slate 15 No connection Slate Black The following part of the wiring chart applies to both the G4x16 and G8x16 MBMs 49 No connection Violet Brown 24 No connection Brown Violet BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 238 Appendix K G4x16 and G8x16 wiring charts Table 51 G4x16 and G8x16 lower RJ 21 amphenol connector wiring for analog PSTN lines Sheet 2 of 2 Default line numbers on Default line numbers on Line Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 Aux 50 Tip Violet Slate see 25 Ring Slate Violet Note Note The Aux port supports full data speeds When the line is in use by an analog devi
261. tection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate Do not attempt to repair this equipment If you experience trouble write for warranty and repair information USA Canada Nortel Nortel Repair Service Centre 30 640 Massman Drive 30 Norelco Drive Nashville TN USA Weston Ontario Canada 37210 M9L 2X6 For warranty and repair service outside the USA or Canada please contact your distributor Canadian Notice The Industry Canada designation identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 22 Regulatory information Federal Communications Commission FCC Notice FCC registration number This telephone equipment complies with Part 68 Rules and Regulations of the FCC for connection to the Public Switched Telephone Network Your connection to the Public Switched Te
262. telephony services on page 142 To initialize voice mail on page 143 To enter a keycode 4 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select Keycodes The Keycodes panel appears Click Load File The Open dialog box appears Select the keycode file for your system and then click Open For details about generating and entering the keycodes for your system see the Keycode Installation Guide To configure the LAN IP address 1 2 3 From the Configuration tab click the System folder to expand it Select IP Subsystem Select the General Settings tab It is normally selected by default BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 142 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 4 Configure the IP Settings attributes See the table Modify IP Settings attributes on page 142 Table 22 Modify IP Settings attributes Attribute Description Published IP address The IP address of the BCM50 system Published IP Interface The IP interface being used by the BCM50 system Default gateway The gateway used by the BCM50 system Note If you modify any of the attributes then the Element Manager session disconnects To configure the modem A OO N Select Dial Up Interfaces From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it Select the Modem Dial In Parameters tab Select the Enable modem dial in check box to enable the
263. tem Solid yellow Off Power on self test POST Lasts for 9 seconds Solid yellow Solid yellow System initializing lasts 14 seconds Solid green Solid yellow Kernel initialization lasts 8 seconds or Safe OS Solid green Blink green Services initializing lasts 1 minute Solid green Solid green Normal operation Solid green Solid red Services initialization failed LED states seen during Safe Mode start up sequence Solid red Solid green System running with factory default settings enabled Solid red Solid red System running in Software Reset mode Solid red Blink yellow System running in Configuration Reset mode LED states seen during shut down sequence or failure Solid green Blink yellow Graceful shutdown in progress Off Solid yellow Graceful shutdown completed Solid red Blink yellow Overheat detected Thermal shutdown completed NN40170 305 Chapter 3 Viewing the BCM50 system LEDs 63 Table 8 System status LED states and descriptions Power Status Description Solid red Solid red Power spike or Rail power fluctuation detected Blink red Solid red Rail power fluctuation Power Monitor Shutdown completed Solid yellow Solid red Power spike shutdown completed temperature and Rail power ok Off Off No power system is shut down power cable is disconnected Start up Profile LED states seen only during initial system install or staging Blink Yellow
264. tervals including after initial installation Performing a backup ensures that you have a copy of your system data available to restore the system if needed For information about backing up and restoring your system see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Administration and Security NN40170 305 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 161 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN This section describes how to connect the LAN and WAN cables to the BCMS0 system The figure Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system on page 161 shows the steps required to connect the data networking cables to the BCM50 system Figure 65 Overview of connecting data networking cables to the BCM50 system Connect the BChHO system to the LAN and WAN Connect the system to the LAN Do you have an integrated router Initial configuration of router Do you have a BCh H0a or BChHle Connect the BChHDe to the WAN Connect the BChH0a to the DSL loop For information about connecting the cables to the BCM50 system e Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN on page 162 e Connecting the BCM50 system to the WAN on page 163 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 162 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN On BCMS50 and BCMS50b main units three RJ 45 connectors support LA
265. that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system This type of trunk provides one way incoming only call service BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 290 Appendix N Market profile attributes NN40170 305 291 Index Numerics 4x16 default DNs 232 default line numbers 232 hardware description 48 49 wiring chart 231 235 A accessories ATA2 121 ADID description 47 setting dip switches 99 ADID4 default line numbers 225 wiring chart 225 ADID8 wiring chart 225 American Society of Composers Authors and Publishers Music on Hold licence 24 amphenol connector 48 49 analog equipment ATA2 121 analog port termination 127 analog station media bay module ASM 8 49 analog station modules 48 analog telephone ASM 8 and ASM 8 modules 49 analog terminal adapter 2 see ATA2 ASM default DN 243 hardware description 49 wiring chart 243 ATA2 data communication 124 data transmission requirements 124 insertion loss measurement 126 installing 121 maximum loss 126 mounting on wall 125 overview power source 125 troubleshooting 170 auxiliary ringer wiring 210 BCM50 ASM analog station module 49 DSM 16 and DSM 32 digital station module 48 DTM digital trunk module 45 field replaceable units 59 installation prerequisites 79 installing 75 BCM50a 64 BCM50e 65 BRI line types 287 BRI onboard default line numbers 214 LED 67 BRIM default
266. the power connector to the expansion unit Expansion port An RJ 45 jack used to connect the expansion unit to the main unit Ejector The ejector is used to remove the media bay module from the expansion unit MBM bay A slot into which you install an MBM To connect an MBM to the BCMS0 system you must install the MBM in the expansion unit and then connect the expansion unit to the main unit See Installing an expansion unit on page 97 for more information about installing an expansion unit Warning Make sure you disconnect the power supply to the expansion unit l f D before inserting or removing an MBM The supplied Ethernet cable shielded connects the expansion port on the expansion unit to one of the two expansion ports on the main unit See the figure Expansion unit and expansion connectors on page 43 Expansion unit 1 maps to buses 5 6 port2 while expansion unit 2 maps to buses 7 8 port 3 Figure 8 Expansion unit and expansion connectors Expansion unit 1 Main unit Expansion unit 2 nor Buses 5 6 Buses 7 8 The LAN port on the expansion unit is connected to the internal Ethernet switch on the main unit You can use the expansion unit LAN port to connect an additional device to the LAN Note When you plug an expansion unit into the correct port on the main unit the gt LEDs on the expansion unit port light while the LEDs on the main unit port turn off BCMS50 Installa
267. the router WebGUI tool see the Integrated Router Configuration Guide for your product e Clear the Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router check box to use the DHCP server on the main unit You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router using the router WebGUI tool NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 145 For information about using the router WebGUI tool see the Integrated Router Configuration Guide for your product 5 Configure the attributes according to the table DHCP Server General Settings attributes on page 145 Table 25 DHCP Server General Settings attributes Attribute Description Use DHCP Server on Integrated Router Note This attribute is available only on main units with an integrated router BCM50a BCM50e BCM50ba BCM50be Specify whether or not to use the DHCP server on the integrated router If selected the DHCP server on the integrated router is used and the DHCP server on the main unit is disabled If cleared the DHCP server on the main unit is active You must first disable the DHCP server on the integrated router to avoid networking conflicts DHCP server is Select either enable or disable from the list IP domain name The domain name of the network Primary DNS IP address Specify the IP addresses of the primary DNS server in a valid dot format BCM50 automatically assigns the value for this parameter If
268. tilation is provided Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord Do not locate this product where the cord will be abused by persons walking on it Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or electric shock Never spill liquid of any kind on the product To reduce the risk of electric shock do not disassemble this product but send it to a qualified service person when some service or repair work is required BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 24 Regulatory information 11 Unplug this product or host equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions a b When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed If the product has been exposed to rain water or liquid has been spilled on the product disconnect and allow the product to dry out to see if it still operates but do not open up the product If the product housing has been damaged If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance gt Caution To eliminate the possibility of accidental damage to cords plugs jacks and the telephone do not use sharp instruments during the assembly procedures A Warning Do not insert the plug at the free end of the handset cord directly into a wall or baseboard jack Such misuse can result in unsafe sound levels or possible damage to the handset 12 Save these instructio
269. tion Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language Italian English UKEnglish English Norwegian Polish first is default English French French English EuroFrench Spanish Spanish Swedish English Turkish Danish Czech BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 264 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 63 Italy Mexico New Zealand North America Norway and Poland Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Analog VSC None None 141 None None 1831 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None 141 None None 1831 pulse BRI VSC None None 141 None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple Detailed None Simple Simple Release code On On Off Off On On Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 110 DTMF parameters ms Pause time ms 3 5 1 5 3 5 1 5 3 5 1 5 Interdigit time 100 80 100 80 100 80 ms Table 64 Russia and South Africa parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Functionality Attribute Russia South Africa Access codes Direct dial digit 0 9 Dest code for 9 0 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk protoc
270. tion and Maintenance Guide 44 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Note When generating your keycode you must select the feature for the expansion ports you require If your keycode contains the feature for one expansion port only the expansion port on the left port 2 is active Media bay modules The media bay modules MBM connect with external devices to implement various types of voice trunks and extensions You can install one MBM in an expansion unit and you can connect up to two expansion units to the BCMS0 system Note To determine which media bay modules and which types of trunk lines are available in your location see Interface availability on page 245 The back of the MBM has a single connector that provides signaling channels media channels and power to the MBM This connector plugs into the MBM backplane in the expansion unit Some MBMs also have a cooling fan that operates using the MBM power source The figure Media bay module connectors rear view on page 44 shows the rear views of the two types of MBMs Figure 9 Media bay module connectors rear view Signaling media and power connector Signaling media and power connector NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 45 Trunk media bay modules Trunk media bay modules connect telecommunications lines to the BCM50 system The table Trunk MBMs on page 45 lists the types of trunk media bay modules that a
271. tions made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas Caution Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician International regulatory information The CE Marking on this equipment indicates compliance with the following This device conforms to Directive 1999 5 EC on Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment as adopted by the European JS Parliament And Of The Council This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures Hereby Nortel declares that BCM50 units with Model No NT9T61XX NT9T62XX NT9T64XX and NT9T65XX are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999 5 EC Information is subject to change without notice Nortel reserves the right to make changes in design or components as progress in engineering and manufacturing may warrant This equipment has been tested and found to c
272. to a single telephony system e provides telephony applications for use in a business environment e provides a DHCP enhancement feature for the main units with integrated router For information about the BCM50 hardware components e Main units on page 37 e BCM50 Expansion unit and media bay modules on page 42 e BCMS5S0 hardware on page 52 e BCMS50 components on page 54 e Field replaceable units on page 59 Main units The primary hardware component in the BCM50 system is the main unit The six BCM50 main units are divided into two series standard and basic rate interface BRI The BRI or b series main units include BRI ports that replace the four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector on the standard series Note The generic term main unit used throughout this document refers to any of the six main units BCM50 BCM50a BCM50e BCM50b BCM50ba and BCM50be available for a BCM50 system To indicate features specific to a particular variation of main unit that variation of main unit is clearly identified for example BCM50ba e Standard series BCMS50 main unit with Telephony only The BCM50 main unit provides call processing and simple data networking functions It provides connections for 12 digital telephones 4 PSTN lines 4 analog station ports and 4 connections for auxiliary equipment auxiliary ringer page relay page output and music source The BCMS50 main unit has no router but it h
273. tor on the front of the 4x16 Figure 96 4x16 connectors 4x16 RJ 21 connector Ille olli 5 RJ 21 pin out RJ 11 jacks RJ 11 pin out The table 4x16 RJ 11 port wiring on page 231 and the table 4x16 default line numbering on page 232 list the wiring details for the RJ 11 jacks on the 4x16 This wiring applies to the numbered ports and the Aux ports Table 47 4x16 RJ 11 port wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Pin Signal 1 No connection 2 No connection 3 Ring 4 Tip BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 232 Appendix J 4x16 wiring charts Table 47 4x16 RJ 11 port wiring Sheet 2 of 2 Pin Signal 5 No connection 6 No connection Table 48 4x16 default line numbering Port number Default line number on Expansion port 1 Default line number on Expansion port 2 1 065 095 2 066 096 3 067 097 4 068 098 The table 4x16 RJ 21 connector wiring on page 232 lists the wiring details for the RJ 21 connector on the 4x16 Table 49 4x16 RJ 21 connector wiring Sheet 1 of 2 Default DN on Default DN on Set Pin Connection Wire color Expansion port 1 Expansion port 2 26 Tip White Blue 1 253 285 1 Ring Blue White 27 Tip White Orange 2 254 286 2 Ring Orange White 28 Tip White Green 3 255 287 3 Ring Green White 29 Tip White Brown 4 256 288 4
274. triction global N A N A N A N A N A N A overrides Restriction filter N A N A 0 N A 00 170 0 0800 1 Service modes 01 1 1800 172 173 1866 1747 1760 1877 1888 1761 1766 911 911 1770 1771 411 976 1772 1775 1976 1778 1783 1 976 1788 900 1900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A i Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 25 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 1 3 118 6 01 17 01 17 9 3 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto None Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None None Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Ena
275. tware updates Nortel frequently updates the BCMS0 software Therefore a standard part of any installation is to ensure your system has the latest version of the software For information about checking for and installing software updates see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Administration and Security Configuring voice mail Your voice mail system was initialized during the basic configuration of your BCM50 system You must still configure your voice mail to take advantage of the many feature available If you need to perform further configuration tasks see the documentation for your voice mail system For information about using the Web based interface to configure your voice mail system see the CallPilot Manager Set Up and Operation Guide and for information about using Telset Administration to configure your voice mail system see the CallPilot Telephone Administration Guide BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 160 Chapter 16 Completing the initial installation optional Customizing security policies You configured a system password and security settings during the basic configuration of your BCMSO system Depending on your needs you can perform further configuration of the security policies For information about customizing the security policies see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Administration and Security Performing a backup You can backup your BCMS0 system at regular in
276. uency Compelled R2 signaling over an E1 trunk PRI ISDN interface with 30 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 Mbps These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks Other Trunk Types BRI The BRI loop supports both trunk T loop and terminal equipment S loop configurations BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbits s and a data D channel that operates at 16 kbits s BRI uses the D channel to carry call information When configured as a trunk T loop the BRI loop supports the following protocol variants NI 2 Connects to the network s S reference point and uses regular line pools These trunks can be manual answer or auto answer ETSI Euro There are two types of connections The S T type connects to the network s S reference point and uses regular line pools These trunks can be manual answer or auto answer The T T type connects to the network s T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type These trunks are auto answer ETSI QSIG Connects to the network s T reference point and uses the Bloc pool type These trunks are auto answer NN40170 305 Appendix N Market profile attributes 289 Table 81 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Trunk Types Description IP Provides H 323 and SIP trunking between BCM and PBX nodes Analog Trunk Types Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line ADID An analog trunk
277. uipment connected to the auxiliary ringer page relay page output and music on hold interfaces must use safety extra low voltage SELV All four interfaces are SELV and the external equipment connected to these interfaces must be SELV If these interfaces are not SELV you must use external line isolation units LIU Note The analog trunk interfaces and analog telephony device interfaces on the RJ 21 telephony connector are compatible with the North American telephony interface standards only If your BCMSO system is in a country that uses a different telephony standard you must use media bay modules for your analog trunks and media bay modules or ATAs for your analog telephony devices NN40170 305 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware 59 Router card The BCM50e main unit has a router card that uses an Ethernet interface to connect toa WAN edge device for example an external ADSL modem or a cable modem The BCM50a main unit has a router card that uses an ADSL interface to connect the BCM50 system to the Internet Service Provider ISP For information about replacing the router card see Replacing an internal component on page 195 Field replaceable units The table Field replaceable units on page 59 and the table Media bay modules on page 59 provide a list of field replaceable units FRU and media bay modules MBM for the BCM50 system Use these tables as references when you need to order replace or inst
278. unication devices to the BCM50 system The table Station MBMs on page 47 lists the available station media bay modules Table 4 Station MBMs Sheet 1 of 2 Module type What it does Special Notes DSM16 DSM32 Connects a maximum of 16 DSM16 or see Digital station media bay module on 32 DSM32 digital telephones to the page 48 BCM50 system 4x16 Connects a maximum of four analog Combination of a CTM4 and a DSM16 public switched telephone lines to the BCM tem see 4x16 media bay module on page 48 EMS u Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 48 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Table 4 Station MBMs Sheet 2 of 2 Module type What it does Special Notes G4x16 G8x16 Combination of a GATM4 GATM8 and a DSM16 see G4x16 and G8x16 media bay module on page 49 Connects a maximum of four G4x16 or eight G8x16 analog public switched telephone lines to the BCM50 system Also connects a maximum of 16 digital telephones to the BCM50 system GASM ASM8 see Analog station media bay modules on page 49 Connects a maximum of eight analog devices to the BCM50 system This module provides the following additional services caller ID pass through message waiting indication and disconnect supervision at the telephone This module downloads new firmware Note
279. unit To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf 1 Insert the power supply retention clip into the BCM50 unit 2 Attach the four self adhesive rubber feet to the bottom of the BCM50 unit by peeling off the paper backing and placing the feet on the unit as indicated in the figure Location for feet on the bottom of the BCM50 unit on page 93 Figure 44 Location for feet on the bottom of the BCM50 unit Attach feet here 3 Position the BCM50 unit on a table or shelf Make sure you leave enough space around the unit for ventilation and access to the cables BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 94 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit 4 Ifthe BCM50 system has additional units you can install the other units on top of or beside the existing BCMS0 unit e To install the additional units beside the existing unit repeat steps 1 to 3 for each unit e To install the additional units on top of the existing unit see the procedure To install a BCM50 unit on top of another unit on page 87 5 Install the power supply using a method appropriate for your installation For details about installation options see Installing the BCM50 power supply on page 94 Installing the BCM50 power supply There are several different ways to install a power supply Select the method that works best for your type of installat
280. units For information about how to configure the router see the BCM50e Integrated Router Configuration Guide Connect one end of a standard Ethernet cable to your WAN edge device for example an external ADSL modem or cable modem For proper setup and configuration of the device see the documentation for your WAN edge device Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the WAN port Proceed to Next step on page 165 To connect the BCM50a or BCM50ba main units to the WAN 1 Use the Integrated Router Web GUI to configure the router card on the BCM50a and BCM50ba main units For information about how to configure the router see the BCM50a Integrated Router Configuration Guide Make sure the power supply is connected to the main unit and to the AC power source wall outlet NN40170 305 Chapter 17 Connecting the BCM50 system to the LAN and WAN 165 Warning Do not plug the WAN cable into the system unless the power supply is IN connected to the main unit and an AC power source with a third wire ground 3 Connect one end of a standard telephone cable to the ADSL telephone line provided by your ISP 4 Plug the other end of the telephone cable into the WAN port Note If you use the ADSL telephone line for both ADSL and regular voice communication you must install a splitter filter Your ADSL service provider supplies the splitter filter Follow your service provider s instructions about connecting the splitt
281. unts and Privileges gt View by Accounts tab User Account NN40170 305 Chapter 12 Configuring the BCM50 system 131 Startup parameters overview The startup parameters are the remaining required parameters that you cannot configure using Telset Administration You must configure these parameters using Element Manager or the Startup Profile See the table Startup parameters on page 131 for a list of the startup parameters Table 21 Startup parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Parameters Telset Administration Element Manager Startup Profile System N A Configuration gt System gt System e System name Identification System N A Configuration gt System gt System e System ID Keycodes View ID is set automatically and cannot be changed Time N A Configuration gt System gt Time e Date and Time source Date and Time e NTP server address e Date and time e Time zone DHCP server N A Configuration gt Data DHCP Server e Use DHCP Server on Services gt DHCP Server gt Integrated Router General Settings tab e Enable disable server e IP domain name e Primary DNS e Secondary DNS e Default gateway IP Phones N A Configuration gt Resources IP Telephones e Enable registration no i gt e Enable global pwd pplication Sets e Global pwd e Auto assign DNs e Advertisement Logo SNMP Agent N A Configuration gt SNMP Agent e Enable disable SNMP Administrator Access gt agent SNMP
282. uro ETSI QSIG and MCDN protocol variants The front bezel of the DTM has an RJ 48C connector that connects the DTM to the service provider connection point The faceplate also has a set of monitor jacks you can use to monitor the span Six additional LEDs are on the front of the DTM For information about these additional LEDs see DTM LEDs on page 68 The figure DTM faceplate on page 46 shows the DTM module interfaces BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 46 Chapter 2 Introducing the BCM50 hardware Figure 10 DTM faceplate 6 OG e266 o5 o Os Of Power Status Monitor jacks RJ 48C digital telephone line connector Basic rate interface media bay module The basic rate interface media bay module BRIM connects a maximum of four BRI ISDN loops to the BCM50 system The BRIM recognizes only the T interface used in European networks To use the BRIM with the U interface typical in North American networks you require an external NT1 box to convert the U interface to a T interface Each BRI ISDN loop you connect adds two telephone lines to the BCM50 system Therefore each BRIM adds a maximum of eight lines to the BCM50 system through the four RJ 48C jacks on the faceplate The LEDs beside each RJ 48C jack are on when the ISDN line is active The figure BRIM faceplate on page 46 shows the BRIM faceplate LEDs and connections Figure 11 BRIM faceplate ISDN BRI S T Interface Loop 1 Loo
283. use To test a station MBM on page 169 If you replaced a trunk MBM use To test a trunk MBM on page 169 If you replaced a 4x16 MBM use To test a station MBM on page 169 and To test atrunk MBM on page 169 To test a station MBM A OO N a Go to an extension on the MBM Check for a dial tone Use this extension to make a call to another extension on the system Use this extension to make a call to an external telephone number To test a trunk MBM BoD Go to an extension that has access to one of the lines on the MBM Select the line or line pool to which the line belongs Check for a dial tone Make a call using the line or line pool BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 170 Chapter 18 Testing basic BCM50 functionality To determine why an MBM does not appear in Element Manager Check that the correct feature for the expansion unit is included in your installed keycode Check that both the Power and Status LEDs on the MBM are solid green e Ifthe Power LED is off check that the power supply cable is properly seated in the expansion unit and the power supply is connected to a working power outlet Also check that the MBM is properly seated in the expansion unit e Ifthe Status LED is not solid green check that the Expansion cable is properly seated in the Expansion port on the expansion unit and on the main unit Check that the MBM and expansion unit are enabled using either Element Manager or Telset Administr
284. uter card on page 205 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 202 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component Caution Use only a Nortel approved replacement part Contact your account representative for the current list of approved replacement parts Warning Protect the hardware components against damage from electrostatic discharge Always wear a ground wriststrap before you handle components Always place the components in static free container To insert the new hard disk Caution Do not use an electric or magnetized screwdriver near the hard disk You can lose the information stored on the disk Shock can damage the hard disk Do not drop or hit the hard disk 1 Attach one end of a grounding strap to your wrist and the other end to a grounded metal surface 2 Connect the hard disk cable and power cable to the hard disk connector See the figure Hard disk and bracket assembly on page 202 Note If the cables do not insert properly check that the notch on the hard disk connector is aligned with the corresponding notch on the cable Figure 83 Hard disk and bracket assembly Hard disk Hard disk bracket screws Hard disk bracket Hard disk power cable connector Hard disk cable Power cable Hard disk bracket screws NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 203 3 Place the new hard disk in the hard disk bracket 4 Use the four hard
285. ved from the unit in the procedure Opening the main unit case on page 196 Do not use any other screws 6 Turn the main unit over so that the top of the unit faces up 7 Proceed to Installing the main unit on page 207 NN40170 305 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component 207 Installing the main unit Use one of the following procedures to install the BCM50 main unit e Installing the BCM50 unit on the rack mount shelf on page 85 e To install the BCM50 unit on the wall mount bracket on page 90 e To install the BCM50 unit on a desktop or shelf on page 93 Connecting the cables Use the procedure To connect the cables on page 184 to reconnect the cables to the main unit BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 208 Chapter 24 Replacing an internal component NN40170 305 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart 209 Appendix A RJ 21 telephony connector wiring chart You can connect 4 analog telephone lines standard main units only 4 analog telephony devices and 12 digital telephones to the RJ 21 telephony connector Note The four analog lines on the RJ 21 telephony connector are available only on the standard main units The four analog lines are not available on the BRI series b series main units which have two BRI ports instead The figure RJ 21 telephony connector on a BCM50 on page 209 shows the RJ 21 telephony connector on a BCMS0 Figure 87 RJ 21 telephony connector on a
286. ver configuration and IP address If an external DHCP server is present A Warning The DHCP server on the main unit is enabled IP Phones only by default If your network already contains a DHCP server then disable the DHCP server on the main unit For more information about disabling the DHCP server on the main unit see the procedure To configure DHCP server settings on page 144 If an external DHCP is present then the BCM50 system uses the IP configuration supplied by the external DHCP server In this case the DHCP server on the main unit supplies only IP Phones with IP configuration information The DHCP server on the main unit does not supply any other devices with IP settings This means that the administrator need not set up the external DHCP server to supply configuration settings to the IP Phones The DHCP server on the main unit must configure a range of IP addresses to supply to the IP Phones The DHCP server uses the top 20 percent of a subnet For example if the external DHCP server supplies the IP address 177 218 21 45 subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 to the BCM50 then the BCM50 DHCP server reserves the range 177 218 21 200 to 177 218 21 254 You can verify and change this default range using Element Manager The administrator must ensure that this range agrees with the network configuration the external DHCP server does not use the range BCM50a BCM50ba BCM50e and BCM50be main units with integrated router
287. verview of replacing an expansion unit Figure 75 Overview of replacing an expansion unit Replace an expansion unit Disconnect the cables Remove the Remove the a i i Remove the expansion unit expansion unit A expansion unit from the from the from the wallmount rackmount desktop bracket shelf Remove the media bay module from the expansion unit Insert the media bay module in the new expansion unit Install the Install the expansion unit on expansion unit the wallmount on the bracket rackmount shelf Install the expansion unit on the desktop Connect the cables Retum the BChHO system to operation BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 190 Chapter 23 Replacing an expansion unit For information about replacing an expansion unit Disconnecting the cables on page 190 Removing the expansion unit on page 190 Removing the MBM on page 192 Inserting the MBM in the new expansion unit on page 192 Installing the new expansion unit on page 193 Disconnecting the cables Use the following procedure to disconnect the expansion unit from the other equipment To disconnect the expansion unit cables 1 Use Element Manager to disable the media bay module MBM that is installed in the expansion unit For more information see the Nortel Business Communications Manager 5 0 Administration and Security Disconnect the expan
288. x to force the user to change the password upon first login Change Password On Login Select this check box to force the user to change the Telset password upon Telset first login 6 Click OK 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 to create more user accounts NN40170 305 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters 149 To configure SRG 1 From the Configuration tab click the Resources folder to expand it 2 Select Survivable Remote Gateway from the Resources folder 3 Select the S1000 Main Office Settings tab 4 Configure the S1000 Main Office Settings attributes For more information about configuring an SRG system see the SRGSO Configuration Guide Next step After you set the basic parameters proceed to Completing the initial installation optional on page 157 BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 150 Chapter 14 Using Element Manager to set the basic parameters NN40170 305 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters 151 Chapter 15 Using the Startup Profile to configure parameters An experienced administrator uses the Startup Profile tool to customize a template with common BCM5S0 parameters The administrator uses this template to configure a single system or multiple systems You create the Startup Profile using the Startup Profile template a Microsoft Excel template You then use a USB storage device to transfer the Startup Profile data to the BC
289. ximum of two expansion units to a BCM50 system Each expansion unit can contain one MBM Note You require keycodes for some hardware to function Optional equipment You can add the following equipment to the BCM50 system to support specific requirements beyond the basic hardware station auxiliary power supply SAPS analog terminal adapter 2 ATA2 if you connect analog equipment to a digital extension line uninterruptable power supply UPS USB hub required if the system uses a UPS Other hardware and tools You need the following equipment to install a BCM50 unit mounting hardware either a rack mount shelf a wall mount bracket per unit or four rubber feet per unit Phillips 2 screwdriver flat blade screwdriver pliers antistatic grounding strap punch down tool BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 82 Chapter 6 Checking the installation prerequisites e surge protector recommended e cables 25 pair cable with right feeding female RJ 21 connectors e 3 5 mm mono audio jack for external music source NN40170 305 83 Chapter 7 Installing the main unit This section describes how to install the main unit You can install the main unit in an equipment rack on a wall or on a desktop The figure Overview of installing the main unit on page 83 shows the steps required to install the main unit Figure 34 Overview of installing the main unit Install the main unit Fre y
290. y Silence 425 11 5 240 ms on 425 11 5 150 ms on 240 ms off 475 ms off Global Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Holland 425 11 5 500 ms on 950 1400 18 333 ms 425 11 5 500 ms on 50 ms off 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off Hong Kong Silence 480 620 14 5 500 ms on 480 620 14 5 500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms off lreland 400 432 14 5 0 4 s 0 4 s 425 17 5 450 ms on 425 17 5 450 ms on 450 ms off 450 ms off Italy Silence 425 8 200 mson 425 8 500 ms on 200 ms off 500 ms off Mexico Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 250 Appendix N Market profile attributes Table 57 Special Dial Overflow and Busy Sheet 2 of 2 Special Dial Overflow Busy Level Level Level per per per Tones Tone Tones Tone Tones _ Tone Market profile Hz dBm0O Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence New Zealand 400 13 0 1 s 0 1s 400 11 5 75 ms on 400 11 5 500 ms on silence 100 ms off 500 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off North America Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Norway Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Poland Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 17 5 500 ms on 1800
291. y module The G4x16 MBM is a combination of GATM4 and DSM16 MBMs while the G8x16 is a combination of GATM8 and DSM16 MBMs The figure G4x16 G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors on page 49 shows the G4x16 G8x16 MBM faceplate with two RJ 21 amphenol connectors The upper RJ 21 amphenol connector connects 16 digital telephones to the system while the lower RJ 21 amphenol connector connects 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines with pulse and tone dialing caller ID and disconnect supervision in selected markets Figure 16 G4x16 G8x16 faceplate LEDS and connectors RJ 21 amphenol connector for 16 digital telephones RJ 21 amphenol connector for 4 or 8 analog PSTN lines Power Status Analog station media bay modules The analog station media bay modules ASM8 ASM8 and GASM can connect to a maximum of eight analog telecommunication devices These devices are standard analog telephones cordless telephones fax machines answering machines or modems The maximum speed for a modem connection is 28 8 Kb s In addition to ASM8 features the ASM8 and GASM offer the following features e Visual Message Waiting Indicator VMWD LED indicates to the end user that a message is waiting e Caller ID provides the name phone number and other information about the caller to the end user at the start of the call e Firmware downloading capability The core can upgrade the ASM8 and GASM firmware at customer sites BCMS50 Installation
292. ystem BCMS50 Installation and Maintenance Guide 122 Chapter 10 Installing telephones and peripherals For the requirements and procedure to install the device see Installing the analog terminal adapter on page 123 Installing an emergency telephone You can use the emergency telephone to make calls when no power is available to the BCM50 system Emergency telephone will work if it is connected to CSC 1 0 hardware however it will not work with later hardware versions Emergency telephone will work only if it is connected to expansion unit with a caller ID trunk module CTM or a global analog trunk module GATM on the CSC 1 0 Indicated by telegraph pole label and providing first line and first analog set To install an emergency telephone on the BCM50 system connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM GATM When you make a call from the emergency telephone the auxiliary port uses the telephone line connected to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM You can connect an emergency telephone to every CTM installed on your BCMSO system To install the emergency telephone 1 Connect a single line analog telephone to the auxiliary port on the CTM or GATM 2 Connect an analog PSTN line cable to the line 1 port of the CTM or GATM 3 On the main unit if CSC 1 0 Connect a single line analog telephone to the first analog station port on the main unit pins 30 5 i e White Slate amp Slate White

Avaya BCM50 Installation and Maintenance Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents